advertisement
Lake
®
Controller
Rev 1.4.5
Item no. OM-LC
Table of Contents
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
i
9. Module File Types & LoadLibrary
ii
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
iii
iv
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Welcome
1. Welcome
1.1 Important Information
In January 2009, Lab.gruppen acquired from Dolby Laboratories, Inc. both the Lake trademarks and the exclusive rights for use of Dolby
®
Lake
®
Processor technology for both touring and permanent sound reinforcement markets. Lab.gruppen is now developing the Lake Processing technology and the Controller software independently for these markets. The Lab.gruppen-developed Controller software version will be forthwith named Lake Controller software.
1.2 Introduction
The Lake Controller software provides a unified interface for the Lab.gruppen PLM
™
Series,
Lake LM Series and the MY8-LAKE (Yamaha Mini-YGDAI). Optimized for a wireless touch-screen or Tablet
PC, the Controller uses a unique graphic interface that brings back the feel of analog faders and controls.
The software operates on any Microsoft
®
Windows
®
PC with a standard Ethernet network interface.
The Lake Controller may also be accessed via media tablet devices such as the Apple
®
iPad
™
by using remote desktop connectivity software that requires additional configuration. For further details on configuring the Lake Controller for use via a media tablet, please refer to the Product Documentation category of the support section at http://lakeprocessing.com.
This manual describes the functionality of the Lake Controller software suite, including the main
Lake Controller component, along with associated Firmware Update Utilities and Preset Manager Utilities.
For a full understanding of the Lake Controller System, use this manual together with associated hardware operation manuals, audio networking information and quick reference guides that are provided in the documentation folder of your software installation.
Note that the Lake Controller software has all necessary functionality to control the Lake LM Series devices,
Lab.gruppen PLM Series devices and the MY8-LAKE (Yamaha Mini-YGDAI). Support for legacy devices including the Dolby Lake Processor
™
,Contour Pro 26
™
and Mesa Quad EQ
™
discontinued in Lake Controller v6.x; for control of these devices please use Lake Controller v5.x.
Throughout this manual, the generic term ‘device’ will be used to describe any hardware product containing
Lake Processing technology.
1.3 Controller Overview
Using the Controller software, a sound engineer can control a distributed network of Lake devices from a single location. Instant adjustments can be made to any parameter of any device on the network, or to selected device Groups. By creating Groups, the Controller can deliver the appropriate EQ and level settings to a large, segmented sound system.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
1
Welcome
A single device can belong to multiple Groups (up to 28); for example, a traditional arena-sized system comprises several left and right main stacks, side-, front-, and down-fills, and multiple levels of delays to different subsystems. Typical technology requires a chain of processing units to enable an overall stereo master and various sub-masters to individually control equalization, dynamics, and gain.
In contrast, the Controller can use multiple Groups to send global adjustments to all PA areas while still providing independent control of individual system components.
1.4 Manual Overview
This operation manual provides software installation instructions, a tutorial for new users, and full-detail reference information for all software functions and features of the Lake Controller user interface.
The manual is organized as follows:
▸
Chapter 1, Welcome, this chapter.
▸
information for configuring various Tablet PC related options.
▸
tion, and verifying of both wired and wireless Lake Controller and device connectivity.
▸
the terminology utilized in the user interface.
▸
Chapter 5, Home Menu Reference, describes the top-level functions of the button bar located at the
bottom of the Lake Controller user interface.
▸
Chapter 7, EQ/Levels Menu Reference, details the functions found within the EQ/Levels menu. This
menu provides the most commonly used functions within the Lake Controller.
▸
Chapter 6, System Store Recall Menu Reference, describes menu functions related to saving and
recalling system configuration files.
▸
Chapter 8, Modules Menu Reference, details the functions found on the Modules Menu, including how
to store and recall Module files, Super Module functionality, adjusting the I/O configuration of Modules and Super Modules, and accessing other Module-specific functions.
▸
including traditional crossovers, linear phase crossovers, and Mesa EQ Modules.
▸
Chapter 10, Groups Menu Reference, describes Groups, which provide a sophisticated way to partition
complex systems, enabling system-wide control of EQ and Levels in real time. This chapter details all functions related to creating and assigning Modules to Groups.
2
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Welcome
▸
Chapter 11, Solo/Mute Menu Reference, describes functionality relating to Solo/Mute.
▸
Chapter 12, Icon Control Menu Reference, describes how to change the size of Module icons within the
interface, as well as how to change meter icon views.
▸
Chapter 13, User Preferences Menu Reference, provides explanation of the functions contained in the
User Preferences menu, including access to Designer Mode, daylight operation, Show mode, and more.
▸
Chapter 14, Pages Menu Reference, details the functions associated with adding and naming new page
displays within the user interface.
▸
Chapter 15, Network Menu Reference, describes how to change between available networks, along
with details on Multiple Controller functionality.
▸
Chapter 16, Communication and Synchronization, describes how the Lake Controller synchronizes to
Lake devices, and provides explanations and suggestions on how to resolve issues that may arise due to network problems, such as moving out of range of a wireless access point.
▸
Controller to display and control third-party analzyers.
▸
Chapter 18, Designer Mode Menu Reference, details the security features provided by the Designer
Mode of operation.
▸
to PLM Series devices.
▸
to the LM Series devices.
▸
Chapter 21, MY8-LAKE Reference and Operation, provides Lake Controller specific information relevant
to MY8-LAKE devices.
▸
Chapter 22, Keyboard Shortcuts, details the available Lake Controller keyboard shortcuts.
▸
the Lake Controller, including GPIO, AMX
®
, Crestron
®
.
▸
Chapter 24, Command Line Options, provides the list of available switches that can be used when
starting the Lake Controller to provide alternate functionality.
▸
Chapter 25, Firmware Update, presents the methods in which you can update the firmware of your
Lake device using the associated Firmware Update Utilities.
▸
Chapter 26, Preset Manager, provides information on using the separate Preset Manager utilities that
are provided in the Lake Controller software suite.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
3
Welcome
▸
Lake Controller and Lake device network.
the features and terminology. For information on Lake device hardware and front panel functionality, please refer to the associated operation manuals.
The information in this manual is based on the use of a touchscreen Tablet PC, which utilizes a pen interface instead of a mouse. Therefore the word TAP is used instead of CLICK when referring to tapping the pen on the screen, which is equivalent to clicking the left mouse button. If you are using a mouse instead of a pen, substitute a click of your left mouse button when instructed to tap.
4
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Software Installation
2. Software Installation
These software installation instructions assume some basic knowledge of Microsoft Windows concepts, such as selecting menu items, locating folders and files, and starting programs. For more information on
Windows, please consult your Windows documentation.
Before installing the Lake Controller software, please read the license agreement presented at the beginning of the Lake Controller software installer.
It is highly recommended that the video card driver is updated to the latest version prior to installing the
Lake Controller software.
2.1 Computer Requirements
This section describes the recommended computer specifications and settings for optimal use of the
Lake Controller software.
2.1.1 PC Specifications
The recommended computer specifications for using the Lake Controller software are:
▸
1.5 GHz Dual Core Processor or faster
▸
1 GB RAM or greater
▸
256 MB video RAM or greater (ensure latest video drivers are installed)
▸
Windows 7 or later
▸
Microsoft DirectX
®
8.1 or later
▸
100/1000 Base-T wired Ethernet adapter and/or 802.11 wireless Ethernet adapter
▸
A touch-screen Tablet style interface is recommended for optimal user experience
The minimum computer specifications for using the Lake Controller software are:
▸
1 GHz Processor (for Intel Atom processors the ‘emulation’ command line option is required - please
refer to “24. Command Line Options” on page 280)
▸ 512 MB RAM
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
5
Software Installation
▸
128 MB video RAM WinXP, ‘emulation’ for Win 7 (ensure latest video drivers are installed)
▸
Windows XP Service Pack 3 or later
▸
Microsoft DirectX
®
8.1 or later
▸
100/1000 Base-T wired Ethernet adapter and/or 802.11 wireless Ethernet adapter
2.1.2 Video Card Settings
It is important that the video card is configured correctly to ensure smooth operation of the Lake Controller software. Incorrect video card settings may result in corruption of graphics, unusual behavior, or unexpected exit of the Lake Controller software.
In addition to the settings presented below, please visit your video card manufacturer’s website and download the latest drivers for your specific video card. The video drivers that come pre-installed with
Windows are often out of date and do not include enhancements provided by the video card manufacturer’s drivers. Almost all video card issues can be resolved by updating your video card driver to the latest release version.
It is highly recommended that the video card driver is updated to the latest version if you encounter any graphical problems when using the Lake Controller software.
For optimal results, please ensure the follow settings are made on your Lake Controller PC:
▸ A display resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels or greater is recommended. Resolutions of 800 x 600 and
1024 x 600 pixels are supported, but provide a lower-quality interface with some features less accessible or unavailable.
▸ Color should be set to 32-bit (does work with 16 bit, but screen minimize / maximize is faster with a
32-bit color mode setting).
▸
3D Acceleration set for best performance with anti-aliasing turned off.
▸
Hardware Acceleration set to Full (Windows XP only).
2.1.3 Tablet PC and Laptop Power Settings
When using a wireless laptop or Tablet PC with the Lake Controller, you may need to switch off powersaving features, which can reduce the performance of your PC.
6
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Software Installation
If you experience slower performance while using the Controller on battery power, turn off any battery power-saving settings that affect general performance of your PC. Some battery optimizations also affect wireless connection speed; if you experience a slow wireless connection while in Battery mode, these settings should be disabled.
To turn off power-saving features, navigate using the Windows Control Panel:
1. Go to Windows Start Menu > Settings > Control Panel > Power Options
2. As settings vary depending on each Tablet or laptop, please consult the appropriate hardware manual for further information.
Figure 2-1: Power Option Properties
2.1.4 Tablet PC Input Panel Settings
Windows XP Tablet Edition provides the pen action Start Input Panel gesture, which starts the Tablet Input
Panel (keyboard or writing pad). This gesture is a quick movement of the pen from side to side. If the Input
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
7
Software Installation
Panel appears while using the Lake Controller, it will cause flickering because both the Controller and the
Input Panel attempt to be in the foreground.
To disable the Input Panel gesture:
1. Access TABLET AND PEN SETTINGS through the Windows Control Panel.
Start Menu > Settings > Control Panel > Tablet and Pen Settings, Pen Options
2. Select PEN OPTIONS.
Figure 2-2: Tablet and Pen Settings
3. Select START INPUT PANEL GESTURE, and tap SETTINGS.
8
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Software Installation
Figure 2-3: Disabling Start Input Panel Gesture
4. Uncheck ENABLE START INPUT PANEL GESTURE.
5. Tap OK.
6. Tap OK again to store your changes.
2.2 Lake Controller Installation
2.2.1 First Time Lake Controller Installation
To install the Lake Controller software suite, insert the installer CD-ROM or USB key into your computer or double-tap the executable installer that was downloaded via the Internet; choose
INSTALL LAKE CONTROLLER then follow the on-screen setup instructions.
1. Read installation information, and tap NEXT to proceed through the installation dialog boxes.
2. Tap INSTALL when requested.
3. Tap FINISH when installation is complete.
Following successful installation, the Lake Controller icon appears on the desktop.
Before using the Lake Controller with a network of
Lake devices, please follow the configuration
procedures described in chapter 3.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
9
Software Installation
2.2.2 Overwriting Existing Lake Controller Installation
Overwriting an existing installation requires that both the Installation and Shortcut folders be identical to those of the existing installation.
If you decide to overwrite your existing installation, ensure that you specify the same location during the software installation process.
2.2.3 Multiple Lake Controller Installations
If you wish to retain previous versions of the Lake Controller, please ensure that the installation location specified during software installation is unique.
Only one instance of the software may be used at any one time. Be aware that different versions of the software are only compatible with certain firmware versions.
2.3 Moving User Files between Installations
To copy preset files from an existing (old) installation to a new Lake Controller installation.
1. Tap Windows Start > All Programs > Lake Controller vX.X > User Data Files
Where X.X is previous version of the Lake Controller installation.
2. Tap Windows Start > All Programs > Lake Controller vY.Y > User Data Files
Where Y.Y is the latest Lake Controller installation.
3. Use the two Explorer folders that are now visible to transfer user files and folders between the old and new installations of the Lake Controller.
10
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Network & Firewall Overview
3. Network & Firewall Overview
This chapter provides an overview of key requirements in terms of firewall configuration, wired and wireless network configuration, and Dante audio network configuration. The separate Lake Network Configuration
Guide and Dante configuration literature that is included as part of Lake Controller installation should also be consulted for additional information.
3.1 Ethernet Overview
responsible for connecting to the cabling and Ethernet switches. For communication to occur, each device must have a valid IP address. The IP layer uses these addresses to route packets between devices. The transport layer provides flows of data and is used by applications to communicate with each other over the network.
The Lake Controller uses UDP messaging to communicate with Lake devices on the network. Network setup and configuration is fast and easy; simply hook up all the devices on the network, and the
Lake Controller software detects and communicates with all devices as required.
Figure 3-1: TCP/IP Protocol Suite
Lake devices are configured to use Automatic Private Addressing which allocates IP addresses from the range 169.254.x.x. In most scenarios, this automatic allocation setting will not need to be changed. However, if the device is integrated into a sophisticated network configuration, the IP address allocation method can be changed using the Lake Controller software.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
11
Network & Firewall Overview
3.2 Firewall Configuration
3.2.1 Overview
The Lake Controller, Firmware Update, and Preset Manager utilities may not display devices that are connected to the network if a firewall is enabled and is blocking these programs from obtaining network access.
Lake applications utilize TCP/IP networking for Controller and device communication and must be allowed access through any firewall in order to work correctly.
The application “mDNSresponder.exe” is part of the Dante Discovery service for device advertisement and discovery and is required by the Lake Controller for networking purposes; it is also safe to allow this application access to the network.
UDP-Broadcast traffic cannot be blocked as it forms part of the unique device discovery process.
3.2.2 Windows 7 Specific
By default, Windows 7 security functions will display a security alert similar to that shown in the first time each application is started.
Figure 3-2: Standard Windows Firewall Security Alert
12
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Network & Firewall Overview
1. Select checkboxes to allow the Lake Controller (or other Lake application) to access both the Private and
Public networks.
2. Tap Allow Access.
When the Lake Controller or other Lake application opens without this warning, but connected Frames cannot be identified on the network, the application firewall settings can be verified manually:
1. Type “firewall” into the Windows 7 search feature as shown in Figure 3-3.
2. Select “Allow a program through Windows Firewall” from the list of Control Panel options.
3. Tap Change Settings and locate the Lake application in the list
4. Ensure all checkboxes are marked then tap OK
Figure 3-3: Allow a Program through Windows Firewall (via Win 7 Search)
3.3 IP Address Configuration
The network card of the host computer running the Lake Controller must have a valid IP address to communicate with Lake devices on the network.
By default, Windows computers are configured to obtain an IP address automatically. This default setup works successfully for most configurations and is the recommended starting point. On an unmanaged network this option will allocate the PC an IP address from the range 169.254.x.x.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
13
Network & Firewall Overview
If using automatic IP address allocation, please ensure your Ethernet switch and/or Lake devices are turned on and connected to your PC for a minute or so (Windows XP - generally faster on Windows 7) before starting the Lake Controller. This allows Windows time to correctly identify your PC’s IP address, and therefore allows the Lake Controller to communicate properly when it scans the network.
If you are on a managed network (such as a corporate network) with a DHCP server and you are having communication problems, it is recommended that you change the IP addressing mode on the devices to use DHCP. Please consult a network specialist if you have trouble with complex network configurations.
A fixed IP address is useful if you are frequently switching between network adapters, or unplugging and reconnecting your network cable. The automatic IP address allocation used by Windows requires a valid network to be present, and can take up to one minute for the PC to discover its IP address. In this case it is recommended that you try using a fixed IP address in the same subnet as that used by default address allocation (i.e. 169.254), but using the reserved ranges of either 169.254.0.x or 169.254.255.x.
The IP address ranges 169.254.0.x and 169.254.255.x are reserved by IANA so future use of these address ranges cannot be guaranteed.
You can specify a fixed IP address by following these steps in Windows 7:
1. Tap the Windows Start icon, type “network” in the search bar then tap NETWORK AND SHARING
CENTER from the options listed under the Control Panel heading as shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4: Opening Windows Network and Sharing Center
14
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Network & Firewall Overview
2. Select the appropriate network connection (Local Area Connection or Wireless Network Connection) to
configure, then select “Change settings of this connection” as shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5: Selecting Wired Network Connection
Although this tutorial uses Local Area Connection as an example, the principles also apply to Wireless
Network Connection.
3. Select INTERNET PROTOCOL VERSION 4 (TCP/IPV4), and tap the PROPERTIES button.
Figure 3-6: Local Area Connection Properties
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
15
Network & Firewall Overview
4. Select “Use the following IP address,” enter an IP address, tap TAB or tap in the Subnet mask box to auto-populate with the correct mask.
Figure 3-7: TCP/IPv4 Properties
5. Tap OK to apply changes, and exit Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties.
6. Tap OK to apply changes, and exit Local Area Connection Properties.
Please refer to Chapter 27 for more information on the selection of an appropriate IP address.
3.4 Wired Network Setup
3.4.1 Overview
The Lake Controller host computer can be connected directly to any Lake device through the Ethernet connectors. Multiple devices can be connected by cascading connections between units, although this is not a recommended solution for the successful use of Dante
™
(Digital Audio Networking via Ethernet). Connecting devices via a good quality external Ethernet switch with QoS is highly recommended. Please refer to tutorial
The Lake Controller can be connected to a network of Lake devices using a wired or wireless Ethernet solution. A wired network is a simpler, faster and more robust solution and should be implemented where possible in preference to using a wireless system. Additionally, when implementing Dante audio networking in conjunction with a wireless access point for Lake Controller data, additional configuration of an external
16
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Network & Firewall Overview
Ethernet switch is required to filter Dante audio traffic from reaching the access point. Please refer to
The Controller can connect anywhere on a network of Lake devices. LEDs next to each port flash to confirm valid communication. Please connect the Controller computer to the network with an Ethernet cable, and follow the verification steps in the next section.
3.4.2 Verifying Wired Controller and Device Communication
Once the network is connected, follow these steps to confirm communication between the Lake Controller and Lake devices:
1. Double-tap the Lake Controller shortcut icon from the Windows desktop. The SELECT NETWORK
Adapter dialog box (shown) appears if your computer has more than one network interface enabled.
This typically occurs if your PC has both wired and wireless network interfaces.
Only one network adapter should be enabled on your PC when using the Lake Controller. Network adapters can be disabled via the Windows Network and Sharing Center > Change Adapter
Settings.
2. Select the Ethernet adapter currently used for the network (the wired adapter for this example).
Figure 3-8: Select Network Adapter
When the Controller begins, you will be prompted with a dialog box asking whether to load the last configuration.
3. Tap NO to this dialog. The Main page of the Controller is displayed.
4. To verify that the devices are on the network and communicating, tap the Modules button.
The Module scroll bar will be displayed.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
17
Network & Firewall Overview
Figure 3-9: Module Scroll Bar
The icons on the left of the Module scroll bar represent Virtual Frames, which are always available whether or not the network is connected. Virtual Frames allow you to create a complete system configuration offline.
If your network connections are valid, all devices connected to the network appear on the Module scroll bar to the right of the Virtual Frames.
on the network. The number of Modules within a Frame depends on the device type/configuration. Modules shown with a circle are available on the network, but not currently in use; Modules identified with text
information on Modules and Frames.
3.5 Wireless Network Setup
3.5.1 Overview
Several hardware manufacturers supply wireless networking solutions that adhere to the various 802.11 wireless Ethernet standards. This means that any standard Ethernet 802.11 wireless networking solution should work with this network system.
When using a wireless access point on the same network as Dante digital audio, an approved external
Ethernet switch must be configured to filter Dante audio packets from reaching the wireless network.
Please refer to section 3.6.3 for further information.
An access point is used in a wireless Ethernet network configuration to connect Lake devices to the
Lake Controller host computer. The access point is connected to the wired network using standard Ethernet cables. It performs the same function as a switch: receiving, buffering, and transmitting data between wired and wireless networks.
18
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Network & Firewall Overview
Figure 3-10: Basic Wireless Setup (Not Suitable for Use with Dante or larger networks)
Ideally, the procedure just described yields a perfectly functional and secure system. However, there are two complications: Some environments have additional wireless network systems and communications equipment competing for the same airspace used by the Lake system. It is also important to provide security so another wireless network cannot access this network system.
As part of the 802.11 standard, various levels of access control and encryption exist. There are also different communication channels that operate at different frequencies.
The service set identifier (SSID) controls access to this wireless network by functioning as a password or key between wireless network devices to differentiate them from each other. The SSID must be exactly the same on all wireless devices (the access point and all Controller host computers). The SSID is case sensitive.
Although the SSID differentiates among wireless systems, it does not provide security to the network.
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol for wireless networks defined in the 802.11 standard.
The WEP protocol provides the same level of security as a wired network by encrypting data over radio waves to protect it during transmission. It is recommend that WEP encryption is enabled if other computers are connected to your Ethernet network.
3.5.2 Configuring the Tablet PC for Wireless Networking
Assuming that the wireless access point has been set up appropriately and is turned on, we now need to configure the Tablet PC to connect to this access point.
1. Navigate to the Windows Network and Sharing Center as shown in Figure 3-4.
2. Tap the wireless signal strength icon at the bottom-right of the screen in the Windows notifications area and select the wireless access point from the list that appears and tap CONNECT as shown in
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
19
Network & Firewall Overview
Figure 3-11: Connecting to a wireless access point
3. Enter the network security key, or press the button on the wireless access point if requested.
4. If you encouter network problems when using the default automatic IP address allocation (more likely
with Windows XP), please setup a fixed IP address as described in section 3.3.
Please refer to chapter 27 for more information on the selection of an appropriate IP address.
3.5.3 Confirming Wireless Operation of the Lake Controller
To confirm wireless operation:
1. Double-tap the LAKE CONTROLLER icon to start the software. If you have more than one network adapter enabled, the SELECT NETWORK ADAPTER dialog box will be displayed; select the
WIRELESS NETWORK ADAPTER.
2. Tap NO when asked whether to recall the last configuration. A brief resync message will appear for each Lake device on your network, confirming that your network connection is operating properly.
3. Tap MODULES. Each online device is represented on the Module scroll bar by a number of Module icons surrounded by a border.
4. Tap QUIT CONTROLLER to exit.
20
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Network & Firewall Overview
3.6 Dante Digital Audio Networking
Dante provides multi-channel digital audio networking over standard a standard Ethernet network, alongside control data for the Lake network. Various topics relating to network configuration are summarized in this section; for further details please refer to associated Dante literature available via:
Start > All Programs > Lake Controller vX.X > Documentation > Dante Documentation after installing the
Lake Controller software.
Additional Dante product information is available at the Audinate website: http://www.audinate.com/
3.6.1 Dante Controller Compatibility
The LM & PLM Series devices are compatible with Audinate’s Dante Controller software.
Changes made via the Lake Controller will be reflected in the Dante Controller and vice-versa:
▸
When both the Lake Controller and Dante are active, changes will synchronize immediately across both software controllers and affected devices.
▸ When Dante-related parameters are changed via the Lake Controller while the Dante Controller is disconnected or closed, the Dante Controller will inherit the the change the next time it is connected or opened.
▸ When Dante-related parameters are changed via the Dante Controller while the Lake Controller is disconnected or closed, the Lake Controller will identify the Frames as Out of Sync the next time it is connected, or opened using the Recall Last System Configuration option.
3.6.2 Dual Redundant Network Configuration (LM and PLM Series only)
The LM and PLM Series provide dual redundant networking capabilities for Dante digital audio. With dual redundancy activated, the Controller can be connected to the secondary network connection using an IP address in the range 172.31.x.x. on the Lake Controller computer. This configuration allows for fail-over to the secondary network should a problem occur with the primary network.
Do not connect Controllers to the primary and secondary network connections simultaneously.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
21
Network & Firewall Overview
3.6.3 Using Dante with Wireless Data Control or Low-Bandwidth Devices
Dante (Digital Audio Networking) technology requires a reliable 100 Mbps (or faster) network to operate, and therefore cannot operate via a wireless transmitter/receiver. However, in most Lake networks, it is likely that wireless control of the Lake devices will be required on the same network that is transmitting and receiving
Dante digital audio signals.
To achieve this, you must configure the Ethernet switch on the boundary of the wireless network to filter
Dante traffic from reaching the wireless access point or other lower bandwidth devices (e.g. legacy devices such as the Contour Pro 26 or Mesa Quad EQ), or you will most likely experience communication problems.
The diagram below summarizes the desired outcome from correctly configuring your Ethernet switch to filter Dante audio packet
Figure 3-12: Using Dante with Low Bandwidth devices
Please refer to the Audinate
®
document AUD-ANO-ACL Filtering SRW224G4 for further details regarding
ACL packet filtering. This document is available via:
Start > All Programs > Lake Controller vX.X > Documentation > Dante Documentation after installing the
Lake Controller software.
Additional Dante product information is available at the Audinate website: http://www.audinate.com/
3.6.4 Dante with Quality of Service Ethernet Switches
The use of an external Ethernet switch with QoS (Quality of Service) is strongly recommended when using
Dante digital audio over your Lake network. Dante uses standard network QoS techniques available in
22
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Network & Firewall Overview
off-the-shelf Ethernet switches to prioritize clocking and audio traffic, and to allow non-Dante devices such as personal computers to share a single network with Dante devices. The diagram below shows the order of priority given to the different types of data packets going through the switch. Using a switch without QoS, or with QoS turned off on a busy network, may result in audio packets arriving too late to be played out, resulting in audio glitches.
Figure 3-13: Dante Quality of Service Switch Configuration
Please refer to the Audinate document AUD-ANO-QoS Switch Configuration for further details regarding
ACL packet filtering. This document is available via:
Start > All Programs > Lake Controller vX.X > Documentation > Dante Documentation after installing the
Lake Controller software.
Additional Dante product information is available at the Audinate website: http://www.audinate.com/
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
23
Network & Firewall Overview
3.6.5 Recommended Network Topologies When Using Dante
The use of an external Ethernet 100 Mbps switch with QoS (Quality of Service) is highly recommended. It is also recommended that each device has its own direct connection to that switch. Where switches are connected together, this should be achieved via a gigabit fiber or copper connection.
Figure 3-14: Recommended Network Topologies
Two Lake devices may be daisy chained together and run Dante. The recommended latency when connecting two Lake devices in this manner is 0.8 ms.
Figure 3-15: Only two Lake devices may be daisy chained for use with Dante
24
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Network & Firewall Overview
More than two Lake devices should not be daisy chained together when Dante is being used.
Figure 3-16: Do not daisy chain more than two Lake devices when using Dante
The use of Dante across wireless networks as shown below is not supported.
Figure 3-17: Do not use Dante across wireless networks
Please refer to the Audinate document AUD-ANO-QoS Recommended Network Topologies for further details regarding ACL packet filtering.
This document is available via:
Start > All Programs > Lake Controller vX.X > Documentation > Dante Documentation after installing the
Lake Controller software.
Additional Dante product information is available at the Audinate website: http://www.audinate.com/
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
25
Lake Controller Tutorial
4. Lake Controller Tutorial
This tutorial will help you start using the Lake Controller software quickly and easily by providing an overview of common features. There are many underlying details not covered in this tutorial, so please refer to the other sections of this manual for detailed reference information.
The tutorial uses the Lake LM 26 (Contour Mode) & LM 44 (Mesa Mode) these are the two main types of Modules that are available across Lake-enabled devices. You may however follow this tutorial with any product; most features and functionality are common across all products.
4.1 Starting the Lake Controller
To start the Lake Controller:
1. Double-tap the Lake Controller software icon located on the Microsoft
®
Windows
®
desktop.
2. Tap NO in the dialog box asking if you would like to recall the last configuration.
Tapping YES recalls the configuration in use prior to exiting the last Lake Controller session. A comparison occurs and any differences are highlighted for online Modules. Audio processing is not affected.
The Main page appears and is in its default, blank state.
Figure 4-1: Main Lake Controller HOME Page
26
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
4.2 Overview of Main Page Components
This section covers the various components shown on the main page.
4.2.1 Button Bar Interface
The button bar, located at the bottom of every page in the software, is used to navigate through and activate the Lake Controller features and functions. Three colors indicate the button status:
▸
ORANGE - currently selected menu or function
▸
BLUE - available menu or function based on current selection
▸
GRAY - currently unavailable menu or function
Figure 4-2: Context, Scroll and HOME Buttons
The button with the numbered arrows pointing upward shown in Figure 4-2 is the CONTEXT button, which
enables fast system navigation. Contexts allow you to jump directly from one view to another view without
having to use the tool bar for navigation. For further detail, please refer to section 13.1.
The button with arrows pointing right is active when a page or menu scroll bar contains more information than can be displayed on the width of the screen. Tap this button to move the scroll bar, pages, or overlay tabs to the right, revealing additional data.
The HOME button is available from almost all menu levels, and returns you to the Main page of the system.
Figure 4-3: Scroll and Undo Buttons
active or deactive depending on the screen being viewed. The button with arrows pointing left moves the scroll bar, pages, or overlay tabs to the left.
The button labeled UNDO (or REDO after UNDO has been used) provides a single-level UNDO/REDO function for adjustments made to EQ/levels and crossovers (where applicable).
Generally, labels on buttons describe the open submenu or the function performed by tapping the button.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
27
Lake Controller Tutorial
4.2.2 Help and Status Messages
Context-sensitive help is displayed above the button bar on the left.
Figure 4-4: Context Level Help
System status messages are displayed above the button bar on the right. In the following example, the network status is shown to be offline.
Figure 4-5: Network Status Messages
4.2.3 Page Tabs
At the top left of the user interface, the MAIN and ALL pages are presented. The MAIN page is the default page ready to use. The ALL page provides monitoring of up to 260 Modules on a 1,024 × 768 pixel screen without scrolling. It displays a status summary for each Myodule, with additional status information for
Lab.gruppen amplifiers. More pages can be added as required to logically partition your system.
Figure 4-6: Example Page Tabs
For further details, please refer to section 8.7.
4.2.4 Minimizing the Lake Controller
To minimize the Lake Controller software and return to Windows, tap the Lake icon in the top-right corner of any screen.
Figure 4-7: Use the Lake logo (top right of screen) to minimize the Lake Controller
This icon is animated. It rotates when the software is performing any function that requires the user to wait for data to be transferred or for a processing function to complete.
28
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
4.3 Modules and Frames
4.3.1 Overview
A Frame represents one physical Lake device on the network. Multiple Modules are contained within each Frame. The number of Modules available for a given device is dependent upon the signal processing configuration/capabilities of the device.
PRODUCT
PLM 10000Q
CONFIGURATION
2x4 Power Amplifier
NUMBER OF MODULES
2 Contour Modules
PLM 14000
PLM 20000Q
Lake LM 26
2x2 Power Amplifier
2x4 Power Amplifier
2x6 Loudspeaker Processor
4x4 System Equalizer
2 Contour Modules
2 Contour Modules
2 Contour Modules
4 Mesa Modules
Lake LM 44
4x4 System Equalizer
2x6 Loudspeaker Processor
4 Mesa Modules
2 Contour Modules
4x12 Loudspeaker Processor 4 Contour Modules
MY8-LAKE
8x8 System Equalizer 8 Mesa Modules
2x6 Loudspeaker Processor +
4x4 System Equalizer
2 Contour Modules
+ 4 Mesa Modules
Table 4-1: Overview of Lake Devices and Module Configurations
Figure 4-8 shows the Module scroll bar displaying Virtual Frames for the LM 44, PLM Series and MY8-
LAKE, along with online Frames for the LM 26 and LM 44.
Figure 4-8: Module Scroll bar - Virtual and Online Frames
To place an online Frame in the work area for use during this tutorial:
1. Tap the Module button to display the Module scroll bar as shown in Figure 4-8
2. Tap one of the gray circles (which indicates an available online Frame)
The cursor takes on the form of the selected frame.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
29
Lake Controller Tutorial
3. Place the selected Frame in the work area by tapping in the required location.
An LM 26 (Contour Mode) and an LM 44 (Mesa Mode) are used for most examples in this tutorial; the
Figure 4-9: LM 26 Frame Placed in Main Work area
4.3.2 Module Icons
Each Module icon provides configuration information as shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10: Module Icon Components
▸ Module ID - Identifies a particular Module within the device, represented by this icon.
▸ Frame Label - Identifies the Frame (device) associated with this icon by a user-defined label that also appears on the front panel of the device.
▸
Module Type - Identifies the number of output channels or an abbreviation of a Module type description
(MEq for a Mesa EQ Module).
30
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
▸
Module Label - User-defined label that describes the Module’s use or speaker type.
▸
Module Selection and Clip Indicator - The Module icon border is yellow to indicate the Module is selected. If it flashes red, a channel on that Module is clipping.
▸ Input Mute Indicator - If the central round part of the icon is red, the input is muted; if the icon is blue, the input is not muted.
▸
Output Mute Indicators - Displayed as small red bars when the outputs are muted and are absent if unmuted. The number of mute indicators depends on the number of output channels in the selected
Module type.
▸
Module Label - Displays the label for the Module, in this case a default Classic 3-Way. For further
details on Module label abbreviations and an explanation on Module types, please refer to chapter 9.
4.3.3 Selecting and Moving Icons
Multiple icons may be selected (via the MODULES, GROUPS, PAGES, and ICON CONTROL menus), providing a faster solution to graphical arrangement of the work area. For example, multiple icons can be dragged back to the scroll bar, moved around on screen, or dragged to another page tab.
This example uses an LM 26 (Contour Mode) and an LM 44 (Mesa Mode) for demonstration purposes; the logic remains the same for all types of Group, Module, and Super Module icons.
1. Drag a box around the icons you wish to move.
Figure 4-11: Click and drag around Module icons
2. Release the pen (or mouse); icons inside the yellow rectangle are now selected.
Figure 4-12: Yellow border snaps to selected Module icons
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
31
Lake Controller Tutorial
3. Tap inside the yellow box, and drag it to the new area.
Figure 4-13: Dragging multiple Module icons
4. Release the pen (or mouse); the icons are now deselected.
Figure 4-14: Release to deselect Module icons
To drag icons to a new page, select the icons you wish to move and then drag them over the page’s tab at the top. That page will be automatically selected. You may then place the icons where required.
4.3.4 Labeling Frames and Modules
The Frame label initially shows the product code (e.g. 10000Q) which varies depending on the device. The
Frame label is the same on all Modules in the Lake Controller, and on the front panel of the associated device. The Frame label helps to identify the physical location of a device on the network.
To label a Frame:
1. Tap the A Module to select it.
A yellow border surrounding the Module icon indicates it is selected.
If a Module is not selected, most of the button bar functions are gray to signify they are inactive.
2. Tap LABEL & LOCK.
3. Tap LABEL FRAME to display the on-screen keyboard.
32
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-15: On-screen keyboard
4. Type ‘Demo’ using the on-screen (or external) keyboard, and tap OK.
The Frame label field for the Frame’s Modules displays ‘Demo’.
Figure 4-16: Changing the Frame Label
Now let’s assign a name to the A Module:
5. Tap the A Module to select it.
6. Select LABEL MODULE from the button bar.
7. Name this Module ‘My 3-Way’ using the on-screen keyboard, and tap OK.
8. Tap LABEL EXIT to return to the MODULES menu.
Figure 4-17: Labelling a Module
To label a Super Module, select it in the work area and tap LABEL SUPERMOD.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
33
Lake Controller Tutorial
4.3.5 I/O Config
This section assumes the use of an LM, PLM or
MY8-LAKE in classic routing mode; all providing extensive I/O routing options. The MY8-LAKE in simplified view provides a fixed output config.
1. Tap the I/O CONFIG button to display the block diagrams of each Module in the Frame.
Figure 4-18: LM 26 I/O Configuration Screen
The right side of the I/O CONFIG page can be dragged to scroll up and down for viewing of all Module block diagrams where all diagrams cannot fit on the screen.
2. Tap any black space within the block diagram area and drag up or down to scroll. The I/O CONFIG page is interactive; each blue processing block can be selected to directly access the relevant screen in the software. Each block diagram has a front-end input mixer.
3. Tap any one of the four inputs of the ‘My 3-Way’ Module to access the input mixer.
34
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-19: Four-Channel Input Mixer
The LM Series and MY8-LAKE Contour Modules provide a four-channel input mixer, allowing the inputs to be mixed together differently for each Module. PLMs provide a two-channel input mixer and LM Series and
MY8-LAKE Mesa EQ Modules provide an eight-channel input mixer.
4. Tap the exit button in the bottom-right corner of the Input Mixer pop-up window to return to the
I/O CONFIG screen.
Each output can be custom configured by the user. Tap one of the zoom icons (represented by a magnifying glass) on the right side of the Module’s block diagram. This action will open the Output Configuration window.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
35
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-20: LM 26 Output Configuration
The Output Configuration window provides the ability to route any physical input or Module output to any available analog or digital output on the device. The arrows below the source and destination labels allow selection and mapping of all available I/O.
LM Series devices provide the ability to route any of the eight the Input Router Outputs directly to any output. This allows fail-over input switching to be configured for pass-thru / format conversion purposes. For instance, an input router can be configured for fail-over to Analog if AES input fails, and the whichever audio is used can be passed through to Dante (or any other output type). For further information, please refer to
5. Tap the blue EXIT/RETURN button in the bottom right to return to the I/O CONFIG page.
The left side of the I/O CONFIG summary screen provides both clock and INPUT CONFIGURATION functions along with other Frame specific functionality. Status information is provided, and zoom icons open pop-up windows for access to configuration parameters.
Lake devices have sophisticated digital clocking systems, allowing selection between internal and external clock sources at all standard audio sample rates. By default, all Lake devices (except the MY8-LAKE) use
36
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
an internal clock operating at 96 kHz. You can choose to use any available external clock source using the interface provided by the clock source configuration window.
Figure 4-21: LM 44 Digital Clock Configuration
The current Primary Clock Source is shown on the top left of the screen, and the current Sample Rate
Converter Clock Source is shown on the top right. You can choose any available clock source using the
Clock Source Selector scroll bar at the bottom of this window.
Please refer to each product’s Operational manual for further details on clocks, clock source priorities, sample-rate converters, and signal processing latency the product.
The INPUT CONFIGURATION pop-out window allows flexible routing of all available inputs to each Input
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
37
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-22: LM 44 Input Configuration Screen
From this interface, you can allocate which input is used for each input channel of the Input Mixer, and in which order up to four inputs should auto-select (fail over) for each input channel.
The input AUTOSELECT feature allows you to set up a redundant system. The device will attempt to use the first signal; if the first signal is unavailable it will try the second, third, and fourth signals.
Tapping DISPLAY DETAILS allows control of digital clock selection/digital gain offsets and analog input
headroom as shown in Figure 4-23.
DIGITAL GAIN OFFSET allows fine-tuning of gain between different digital and analog signals to allow for a seamless transition between the signal sources.
38
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-23: LM 44 Input Configuration - Details View
The next summary item on the left side of the I/O CONFIG screen (LM Series devices only) is
Figure 4-24: GPIO Configuration (LM Series Devices Only)
GPIO Configuration is used to set the actions for this contact-closure style external control interface. For
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
39
Lake Controller Tutorial
The last item on the left side of the I/O CONFIG page allows remote control of Iso-Float
™
. This powerful feature allows you to troubleshoot grounding issues remotely from the Controller.
Figure 4-25: Analog Iso-Float Status Screen
The ANALOG ISO-FLOAT STATUS window shows you the current state of the device hardware and allows you to make changes to the grounding state of each analog converter card.
After closing the ANALOG ISO-FLOAT STATUS pop-up window, return to the Main page by tapping the
HOME button.
4.3.6 Dante
Dante audio networking technology from Audinate provides a hassle-free digital audio networking solution for Dante-enabled Lake devices providing reliable, sample-accurate, low-latency audio distribution over
Ethernet.
Dante provides a reliable, digital-audio networking system with complete flexibility, ease of use, and cost-effectiveness. With innovative features such as Zen
™
, Dante-enabled Lake devices automatically find each other and also allow any Dante audio channel on the network to be routed to the input of one or more devices.
Dante can be easily integrated into an existing network, sharing the system with normal data traffic. Dante also offers a virtual sound card feature for audio recording, processing or playback using computer-based programs. This feature is enabled by plugging into the standard Ethernet port on a PC; no external boxes or sound cards are required.
On Dante-enabled Lake devices no additional hardware is required; a single Ethernet connection can
Lake product, along with an indication of whether the product provides dual redundant Dante audio network-
ing which as described in section 3.6.2, and the associated Product Operation manuals.
40
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
4.3.7 Levels and Meters
From the Main page, tap the My 3-Way Module icon to display its parameters. This action will enter the EQ and Levels interface for the Module, displaying the EQ screen the first time it is accessed.
Tap the LEVELS tab at the top left of the display to access the LEVELS interface. This provides metering information and faders for adjustment of gains, delays, and limiters.
By default, gain controls and meters are displayed for the input and all outputs of the Module. Mute controls are located below each input and output meter, with a polarity button for the input.
Figure 4-26: Levels Screen
To unmute the Module input, tap the red mute button labeled Input MUTED.
The Module input mute button controls the post input mixer signal mute. To adjust levels of each physical input, tap the Input Mixer button below the
Module Input Mute button.
4.3.7.1 Adjusting Levels
There are three ways to adjust the gain of an input or output:
▸ Make large changes (1 dB increments) by tapping and sliding the fader.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
41
Lake Controller Tutorial
▸
Make small adjustments (0.1 dB increments) by tapping and dragging above, below, or to the left of each fader control.
▸ Adjust the gain to an exact value (0.01 dB increments) by tapping the gain value directly and using the on-screen keyboard to enter the new value as follows:
1. Tap the input gain value (highlighted in blue at the top left of the screen).
2. Enter –3.75 dB of gain, and tap OK.
Figure 4-27: Using the parameter edit function to enter values
The same principles apply to adjusting other levels (delays, limiters, and so on) throughout the
Lake Controller software.
To view/update other types of levels, simply tap the required type of level from the button bar (Delay, Limiter
Max RMS, and so on). The faders and levels change to display the value of the selected level type.
4.3.7.2 Metering
In the Levels interface, all input and output levels are accompanied by metering. Input meters show both average level and peak level, with a user-definable peak hold. Output meters show the aforementioned level metering on the left side of the meter face, and additionally show limiter activity on the right side of the meter face.
Regardless of the level type currently being adjusted, gain and limiter metering is always displayed.
If an audio channel is clipped, the meter face turns red. Additionally, if an audio channel is within 2 dB of clipping, the meter face turns orange.
42
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-28: Clipping and -2 dB warning indicators
As limiters are engaged, the amount of gain reduction is shown with a meter operating in the downward direction.
Figure 4-29: Orange downward meters indicate channel limiting
The limiter meter displays the total amount of limiting resulting from both peak and RMS limiter functions of the LimiterMax
™
loudspeaker protection system.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
43
Lake Controller Tutorial
4.4 Equalization
From the LEVELS interface, tap the EQ tab in the top-left corner of the display to move to the EQ controls for the Module. Parametric EQ (PEQ) is displayed by default.
Figure 4-30: PEQ tab with EQ filter tools and options
Multiple EQ overlays are identified by tabs at the top left of the display. A three-way Module initially has one parametric (PEQ1) and one graphic (GEQ2) overlay, in addition to the XOVER tab. A Mesa EQ Module has a tab labeled HPF/LPF instead of XOVER.
The parametric overlay (PEQ) provides low-shelf, parametric, Mesa, and high-shelf filters. The graphic overlay (GEQ) provides third-octave EQ controls. The XOVER screen allows selection and adjustment of crossover filters, in addition to output EQ.
4.4.1 Graphic EQ
1. Tap the GEQ2 overlay to access the default third-octave graphic overlay. The bottom section of the graphic EQ screen contains the EQ Tool, which is used to select a frequency band for gain adjustment.
Figure 4-31: EQ Selector
2. To select a frequency band, tap and drag the selector left or right. To adjust gain of the selected filter, tap the red rotating X and slide up to boost or down to cut.
If Frequency Lock is off (blue), the frequency can also be selected and changed by directly tapping and dragging a yellow X filter point on the EQ interface.
44
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-32: Graphic EQ Screen
3. Tap Filter Flat on the button bar to flatten the selected filter.
4.4.2 Ideal Graphic EQ
™
A unique innovation found in all Lake devices is the Ideal Graphic EQ. Conventional analog and digital graphic equalizers do not provide intuitive results. For example, pulling up the faders on a conventional graphic equalizer to boost 6 dB at 500; 630; 800; 1,000; 1,250; 1,600; and 2,000 Hz produces the frequency response
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
45
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-33: Conventional Graphic Equalization and Resulting Frequency Response
This measured frequency response is not what you would expect from the graphic EQ controls.
If we use the Lake Controller GEQ overlay to boost 6 dB at 500; 630; 800; 1,000; 1,250; 1,600; and
2,000 Hz, the frequency response is shown by the flat top trace in Figure 4-34.
Figure 4-34: Lake Ideal Graphic EQ and Resulting Frequency Response
46
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
To implement this EQ overlay:
1. Tap and drag the filter tool on the bottom to 500 Hz.
2. Tap and drag the red X upward until the filter’s gain parameter reads 6 dB.
3. Perform these steps for each of the frequencies listed.
all previous graphic equalizer implementations. This is because of the raised cosine filters that give rise to the Ideal Graphic EQ.
Figure 3-7 shows a traditional third-octave graphic EQ filter (red curve) in comparison to a third-octave raised cosine filter. The area highlighted gray shows the difference between the two filter shapes.
Figure 4-35: Comparison of Raised Cosine (blue) and Traditional Third-Octave (red)
4.4.3 EQ Overlays
The concept of EQ overlays is another innovative Lake feature. Tap the PEQ1 tab at the top of the page.
GEQ2 and PEQ1 are two different EQ overlays. The white line represents the composite response of all EQ overlays. It now shows the wide band 6 dB boost created in the GEQ2 tab. In the next section, we will see how multiple EQ overlays interact.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
47
Lake Controller Tutorial
4.4.4 Parametric EQ
To add a parametric filter to the PEQ1 overlay:
1. Tap the parametric filter at top of the EQ display.
2. Tap the screen near 125 Hz to insert the filter there.
Figure 4-36: Adding a Parametric EQ filter on the PEQ1 Overlay
The parametric filter tool is similar to graphic EQ tool except the filter bandwidth is adjustable.
3. Tap and drag the red X up to boost the volume of this frequency.
Figure 4-37: Changing filter gain by dragging the filter point
4. Tap and drag either of the vertical end lines on the filter tool to increase the bandwidth as shown:
48
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-38: Changing the filter bandwidth using the EQ tool
5. Change the center frequency of the parametric filter by tapping and dragging inside the vertical divider lines of the EQ tool.
6. Drag the parametric filter into the same frequency range as the GEQ2 filters to see the result of all the filters (the white composite line in the previous figure).
4.4.5 Add a New EQ Overlay
To add a new EQ overlay:
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
49
Lake Controller Tutorial
1. Tap OVERLAY FUNCTIONS.
2. Tap OVERLAY NEW.
By default, a new overlay is parametric but can be changed to graphic by tapping the OVERLAY GEQ button.
You can also change an overlay from graphic to parametric by tapping this same button, which will read
OVERLAY PEQ in this instance.
4.4.6 Mesa Filter
The Mesa filter is a highly versatile filter that can rapidly adjust a loudspeaker’s frequency response. The
Mesa filter provides a fast, effective optimization tool that truly matches a loudspeaker’s asymmetric response. The Mesa filter allows independent adjustment of the slopes and center frequencies of the lower and higher edges.
To add a Mesa filter to the new PEQ3 overlay:
1. Tap the Mesa filter type at the top of the EQ interface.
2. Tap the EQ display near the frequency you wish to insert the Mesa filter.
Figure 4-39: Adding a Mesa filter
3. Tap and drag up between the red X marks in the EQ display to increase gain.
Figure 4-40: Increasing the gain on a Mesa filter
50
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
The Mesa filter tool has four dividing lines.
Figure 4-41: Mesa EQ Filter Tool
4. Tap between the center and right dividing lines and drag to the right. This spreads the filter points, creating a variable-width flat top.
Figure 4-42: Adjusting the Mesa filter width
5. Tap and drag to the left of the far-left divider line.
Figure 4-43: Adjusting a Mesa Filter Slope
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
51
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-44: Effect of Adjusting the Mesa Filter Slope
The same principle applies to the high-frequency edge (right side).
6. Tap and drag between the two center divider lines to change the frequency.
4.5 Crossovers
The Lake Controller, when used in conjunction with Contour loudspeaker Modules, allows real-time adjustments to crossovers through the XOVER screen.
Crossover frequency and type and post-crossover equalization can be adjusted. In the default three-way configuration, the Contour Module has 24 dB Linkwitz-Riley crossovers with center frequencies set at 250
Hz and 1.6 kHz. Tap the XOVER tab to view the crossover interface.
Figure 4-45: Crossover Screen
52
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
The low-output crossover is selected in this example. Use the crossover tool to change the center frequency. The low and high parts of the crossover are currently combined. Tap the CROSSOVER SPLIT button to split the crossover, and drag the CROSSOVER SELECTor tool left to reduce the frequencies sent to the low output.
Figure 4-46: Splitting and moving the low channel HPF
Parametric filters (with the exception of the Mesa filter) can be added to further modify the crossover. Add a parametric filter near the center frequency of the low-output crossover.
Figure 4-47: Adding a parametric EQ to the low channel
The full response of the parametric filter is shown in blue, but the parametric filter affects only the output it is associated with. The solid white line shows the resulting crossover curve for the low output.
Tap the CROSSOVER SELECT button to display the crossover scroll bar, from which you can select various standard crossover types. If crossover sections are combined, the new CROSSOVER SELECTion is applied to both sides of the selected crossover. If crossovers are split, the CROSSOVER SELECTion applies only to the currently selected output.
To change the crossover type to a 48 dB Linkwitz-Riley:
1. Tap the 1.6 kHz filter box to select that crossover.
2. Tap CROSSOVER SELECT.
3. Select 48 dB Linkwitz/Riley from the scroll bar.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
53
Lake Controller Tutorial
4. Tap CROSSOVER SET.
5. Tap YES in the dialog box to load the new crossover.
Figure 4-48: Changing the crossover slope
The crossover interface provides a fast and easy method for configuring your loudspeaker system. You can create your own presets or build them based upon data available from speaker manufacturers.
4.6 Groups
The Lake Controller allows Grouping of multiple Modules. This unique concept allows the EQ and levels of multiple Modules to be changed with a single adjustment. Every Module may be a member of up to 28
Groups.
All EQ functions available for a Module are also available for a Group, with a maximum of four EQ overlays per Group.
Most Levels functions are also available for Groups, except the following:
▸ LimiterMax RMS Corner
▸ LimiterMax RMS Attack
▸ LimiterMax RMS Release
▸ Input Headroom
▸ Control of output levels where the Group contains Modules of varying crossover types (e.g. 3-Way and
4-Way Modules assigned to the same Group).
54
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
4.6.6.1 Assigning Modules to a Group
To assign both Modules of a Frame to a Group:
1. Tap the HOME button to locate to the MAIN page.
2. Tap the GROUPS button to display the Groups scroll bar.
3. Tap GROUP 1, and then tap the MAIN page to add the Group to your configuration.
Figure 4-49: Adding a Group to the Main page
4. Tap the ASSIGN button, and tap the icons for Modules A and B to assign them to the Group. Assigned
Modules are highlighted with a yellow border.
Figure 4-50: Assigning Modules to a Group
5. Tap the ASSIGN button again to exit ASSIGN mode.
6. Tap GROUPS EXIT or HOME to return to the MAIN page.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
55
Lake Controller Tutorial
4.7 Lake Controller File Types
Before saving the simple configuration just created, it is useful to learn about the file types used to store and recall settings within the Lake Controller software. The following sections describe the various file types.
4.7.1 Base Configuration Files
A base configuration file defines a starting point for the Module setup. It can contain EQ, crossover, and level settings that can be hidden or protected from end-user adjustment. The result of all EQ, levels, and crossover settings for the Module, and any Group that it belongs to, can be combined and stored in the base configuration file.
Figure 4-51: Contour [.cbm] & Mesa [.mbm] Base Configuration Files
4.7.2 Single Module File
These files store all information contained in the base configuration file plus user settings for each Module including the mute states, levels (gain, delay, and limiters), and equalization (filters and EQ overlays).
Figure 4-52: Contour [.csm] and Mesa [.msm] Single Module Files
4.7.3 System Configuration File
This file stores/recalls all information contained within all Contour or Mesa single-Module files on a given network, and additionally includes generic Frame data and all Group assignments and settings.
56
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Lake Controller Tutorial
Figure 4-53: Lake Controller System Configuration File [.csc]
4.7.4 Storing a System Configuration
To store a system configuration file:
1. Tap HOME.
2. Tap SYSTEM STORE/RECALL to display the scroll bar.
3. Tap the STORE SYSTEM button to display the on-screen keyboard.
4. Name the system configuration ‘Example’ and tap OK.
The system configuration is stored and the file is displayed in the scroll bar.
5. Tap the file labelled ‘Example’ to select it.
This activates all recall and store options on the SYSTEM STORE/RECALL button bar.
▸
RECALL AS NEW SYSTEM clears current configuration and loads the selected configuration.
▸
RECALL AS SUB-SYSTEM retains the current configuration and appends the selected configuration.
▸
RECALL COMPARE allows a comparison between the data stored on file and the current system configuration.
▸ RECALL AS VIRTUAL SS (Sub System) loads the data from the file into a virtual offline system, appending it to any currently recalled system configuration.
▸
STORE SYSTEM stores the entire configuration.
▸
STORE SUB-SYSTEM stores only the data in the selected Modules and Groups.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
57
Lake Controller Tutorial
Individual Module settings can also be stored to a file. The single-Module file stores everything about a particular Module, including its EQ overlays, but does not retain Frame data (such as I/O config) or Group assignments. This file can be recalled into any Module of the same type (Contour/Mesa).
4.7.5 Storing a Single Module File
To store the settings of a single Module:
1. Tap the HOME button, then tap MODULES.
2. Select the Module ‘My 3-Way’.
3. Tap MODULE STORE/RECALL.
4. Tap FILE UTILITIES, then NEW FOLDER.
5. Enter the folder name ‘Test’, and tap OK.
6. Tap FILE UTIL EXIT
7. Double-tap the folder icon labelled ‘Test’ on the scroll bar to open it.
8. Tap NEW STORE, name the file My 3-Way, then tap OK.
58
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Home Menu Reference
5. Home Menu Reference
This chapter provides detailed information on the top-level structure of the Lake Controller button bar, located at the bottom of every display within the software.
5.1 Main Screen Home Menu
When the Controller starts, the MAIN page, ALL page, and HOME button bar are displayed.
Figure 5-1: Main Screen - HOME Menu
From the HOME button bar, you can navigate to all user-interface displays and functions provided by the
Controller. Table 5-1 provides a description of each button.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
59
Home Menu Reference
Button Description
Available from most screens in the Lake Controller, the HOME button returns you to the top-level display.
Submenu providing functionality for storing and recalling system configuration files. File utilities are also provided for creating, renaming, and deleting files and folders.
Submenu providing Module functionality. This is one of the most extensive menus within the Controller, providing access to Modules, Super Modules,
EQ, Levels, I/O Configuration, labeling, locking, copying, pasting, removing, recalling, and storing.
Submenu providing Grouping functions. Groups are a powerful component of the Controller, allowing you to Group any number of Modules into logical partitions. Groups provide EQ level control across the set of Modules that are assigned to the given Group.
Submenu providing solo and mute functionality. The solo/mute controls allow you to solo Modules and Groups, and also provide a mode to allow soloing for multiple Modules and Groups.
Submenu providing page functions. You can add pages, label pages, and move Groups and Modules between the pages that you create.
Submenu providing user preferences. These functions include contexts, delay units, designer mode functions, keyboard shortcuts, graphic options, and show mode.
Submenu providing icon control. You can change the size of icons, and change to the meter icon view.
Submenu providing network functions. You can select between available networks and access multiple-controller functions.
Quits the Lake Controller.
Table 5-1: Summary of HOME Menu Options
60
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
Home Menu Reference
The menu reference chapters that follow this chapter provide detailed reference for each of the top-level functions on the HOME button bar.
5.2 Accessing EQ/Levels from HOME
When the Lake Controller displays the HOME button bar, you can tap any icon on the current page to immediately access the EQ/Levels interface for the given Module, Super Module, or Group. This provides instant access to the Module or Group, without having to navigate through the button bar to gain access to these most important parameters.
Tapping a Module icon from HOME is equivalent to the following sequence:
1. From HOME, tap MODULES.
2. Tap a Module icon to select the Module.
3. Tap EQ/LEVELS.
Tapping a Group icon from HOME is equivalent to the following sequence:
1. From HOME, tap GROUPS.
2. Tap a Group icon to select the Group.
3. Tap EQ/LEVELS.
Since the EQ/Levels interface for Modules and Groups is the most frequently used component of the
Lake Controller, this is the first menu reference chapter to be presented.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
61
System Store Recall Menu Reference
6. System Store Recall Menu Reference
The Lake Controller allows the user to store and recall complete system configurations. This enables the same Lake device to be used in entirely different situations, as their complex configurations can be changed in seconds.
6.1 System Store Recall Navigation
From the HOME menu, tap SYSTEM STORE/RECALL. The button bar displays the following options, and a scroll bar also appears containing files and folders.
Figure 6-1: System Store Recall Scroll Bar
The first icon on the system scroll bar is labeled **My Computer**. Selecting this and tapping OPEN will allow you to navigate to folders and files on your hard drive or any removable disk.
The other files shown at the root of this directory are the system configuration files stored from within the
Controller software.
If there are many folders or files, drag the scroll bar to the left or right, or tap the << or >> buttons. Most options on the button bar appear gray and are inactive until a folder or file is selected on the scroll bar.
6.2 Shortcut to Data/User Folder
Default software installation of the Lake Controller places a shortcut in the Windows Start menu:
START > PROGRAMS > LAKE CONTROLLER > USER DATA FILES
In Windows XP this links to:
C:\Program Files\Lake\Lake Controller v5.x\data\user
In Windows 7 this links to:
C:\User\”username”\AppData\Local\VirtualStore\
ProgramFiles\Lake Controller v5.x\data\user
This shortcut can be used to open the Microsoft Windows folder containing your system and Module files.
In Windows 7, all System and Module files stored in the Lake Controller can be located in the virtual store directory.
62
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
System Store Recall Menu Reference
6.3 Recall as New System—Open
The function and label of the button depend on whether a folder or file is selected. The button is inactive when neither a file nor folder is selected.
The button is labeled OPEN when a folder is selected.
To open a folder:
1. Tap the desired folder icon
The selection is indicated by a yellow border.
2. Tap OPEN. Double-tapping the folder icon also opens the folder.
The button is labeled RECALL AS NEW SYSTEM when a file is selected; recalling the file will clear all current settings from the Controller and load the details stored in the file into the associated devices.
To recall a system configuration file as a new system:
1. Tap the desired file to recall.
2. Tap RECALL AS NEW SYSTEM.
3. Confirm the action by tapping the YES button on the warning message.
RECALL AS NEW SYSTEM overwrites current settings in associated Lake devices and will affect audio processing. Presets stored in hardware devices are not overwritten during a system file recall.
6.4 Recall as Subsystem
RECALL AS SUBSYSTEM enables the content of a system configuration file to be added to the current system configuration.
This function adds the Modules, Super Modules, and Groups to your current configuration, or replaces the data if the device is already in use. This function does not automatically arrange icons so they do not overlap. Be careful to either move existing icons before loading a sub-system, or ensure icons are placed appropriately in the stored files.
6.5 Recall Compare
RECALL COMPARE enables comparison of a system configuration file with the system configuration that is currently active in the Lake device. This button is active only when a file is selected.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
63
System Store Recall Menu Reference
To compare the current configuration with one stored in a file:
1. Tap SYSTEM STORE/RECALL.
2. Navigate to the file you wish to compare.
3. Tap the file icon to select it.
4. Tap RECALL COMPARE.
5. Confirm the action by tapping the YES button in the warning message.
This function can help identify any changes that have been made since a file was recalled. Modules with altered data are identified by a red disc behind their normal icon. This indicates that the Lake Controller is out of sync with the device.
Figure 6-2: Module Out of Sync Identification
RECALL COMPARE does not overwrite any data in the device. Audio will not be changed until you tap the button labeled USE DATA IN CONTROLLER.
6.6 Recall as Virtual Sub System (SS)
The RECALL AS VIRTUAL SS button enables you to work on a system file when no physical units are connected. All Frames are seen as virtual. Once the system has been designed, the Virtual Frames can be replaced by physical Frames.
This function adds the Modules, Super Modules and Groups from the selected file to the current system configuration as virtual Modules.
The button will read RECALL AS VIRTUAL SS on screen resolutions of 1024 x 768 or less; the full label
RECALL AS VIRTUAL SUB SYSTEM will be displayed on higher resolution screens.
When recalling a Dante-configured system as a Virtual Sub System, all devices receive new default Dante Device names to ensure no conflicts occur if the same system is recalled multiple times. Dante receivers will subscribe to the same Dante channels prior to the virtual recall.
64
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
System Store Recall Menu Reference
6.7 Store System
The STORE SYSTEM button stores the entire system configuration. If a file is selected on the scroll bar, the name of that file will appear in the on-screen keyboard, allowing the file to be overwritten or for a file name variation to be used.
1. Tap STORE SYSTEM.
2. Confirm the action by tapping the YES button in the warning message
If the selected file is set to read only, the STORE
SYSTEM function is inactive (gray).
6.8 Store Subsystem
The STORE SUBSYSTEM button stores the selected Modules, Super Modules, and Groups as a subsystem.
Only the data from the selected Modules, including Group assignments, will be stored in the file.
1. Navigate the file system, and tap the desired destination folder to select it.
2. Select the required Modules, Super Modules, and Group icons.
3. Tap STORE SUBSYSTEM.
4. Enter the file name using the on-screen keyboard (or an external keyboard).
5. Tap OK.
The scroll bar displays the new file.
6.9 File Utilities
This button provides a submenu containing further functions that manage files and folders from within the
Lake Controller.
6.9.1 Open
This button is active only when a folder is selected. Tap Open to open the selected folder.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
65
System Store Recall Menu Reference
6.9.2 Read Only
This function protects important files from being accidentally overwritten or deleted and is active only when a file is selected. The currently selected file’s status is identified by the color of the Read Only button:
▸ ORANGE - the selected file is set to Read Only.
▸ BLUE - the selected file is not set to Read Only.
To change the status of a file:
1. Tap a file from the scroll bar to select it.
2. Tap READ ONLY to toggle the function on (orange) and off (blue).
6.9.3 Rename
This button changes the name of a file or folder.
1. Tap the file/folder from the scroll bar.
2. Tap RENAME.
3. Enter the new name using the on-screen keyboard (or an external keyboard).
4. Tap OK.
6.9.4 Delete
This button is active only when a file or folder is selected. When a file is selected, this function is not available if the file is set to Read Only.
To delete a file or folder:
1. Tap a file or folder to select it.
2. Tap DELETE.
3. Confirm the action by tapping YES in the warning message.
Deletion of a file is permanent and cannot be restored using the UNDO function.
66
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
System Store Recall Menu Reference
6.9.5 New Folder
This button creates a new folder in the current directory. To create a new folder:
1. Navigate to the directory where the NEW FOLDER will reside.
2. Tap NEW FOLDER.
3. Enter the NEW FOLDER name using the on-screen (or external) keyboard.
4. Tap OK.
6.10 System Presets
The SYSTEM PRESETS function allows entire system configurations to be stored in a network of Lake devices. This enables fast retrieval and switching of configurations as there is minimal data being sent between the Controller and the devices.
Figure 6-3: System Presets Scroll Bar
System Presets are stored in each device and retrieved either via the Controller software (described in this section), via the front panel of the device, or via the relevant Preset Manager utility.
The Preset icon will contain a lock icon is the Preset is locked, and/or a crossed tag icon if the Preset is set to Exclude Labels when the Preset is recalled. For further information on using the Preset Manager Utilities,
6.10.1 Storing a System Preset in Multiple Devices
To store the current system configuration in multiple Lake devices:
1. Set up the configuration as required.
2. From HOME, tap SYSTEM STORE/RECALL, then tap STORE SYSTEM. This ensures that you have a backup of the exact data, which will be stored as a preset in the hardware.
3. Tap SYSTEM PRESETS.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
67
System Store Recall Menu Reference
4. Tap the Group/Module icons that you wish to be stored as part of the system preset.
Icons turn green to indicate selection.
If you require all Frames in your system configuration to be stored as a system preset, tap a Module from
deselect a Frame or Group, tap the icon again.
Figure 6-4: Selecting Multiple Frames for Preset Store via Group Icon
After making the desired Module selections:
5. Tap on an empty preset location from the scroll bar (for example, Preset 1).
The button labeled STORE WITH NEW NAME will be activated.
6. Tap STORE WITH NEW NAME.
7. Enter a preset name using the on-screen (or external) keyboard, and tap OK.
6.10.2 Recalling a System Preset into Multiple Devices
To recall a system preset into multiple Lake devices:
1. From HOME, tap SYSTEM STORE/RECALL, then tap SYSTEM PRESETS.
2. Select each Frame you wish to recall the preset into by tapping Module or Groups icons.
Selected Frames are identified by green icons.
3. Tap the required preset on the scroll bar.
4. Tap RECALL and then OK to the warning messages.
68
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
System Store Recall Menu Reference
The audio will change quickly, but the Controller will not synchronize with the network until you exit the
SYSTEM PRESET menu. A flashing warning message confirms this.
This enables quick comparison between different configurations without the need to synchronize the
Controller after each preset is recalled
Figure 6-5: System Presets Warning Message
The system configuration name of the preset last recalled will flash at the bottom right of the screen.
Once the required system preset has been recalled, tap HOME or SYSTEM PRESET EXIT to synchronize the Controller with the new settings that have been recalled into the devices.
Individual Frame presets can also be recalled from the front panel of each Lake device.
For LM Series devices if the preset recall changes the configuration between Contour and Mesa configurations, a warning will be displayed and
Modules returned to the scroll bar.
6.10.3 Quick System Preset Recall and Comparison
Quick Recall mode instantly recalls each system preset into all selected Frames when the preset location on the scroll bar is tapped. No confirmation messages are displayed while in this mode, and all other preset functions are disabled.
To enable fast recall/comparison of SYSTEM PRESETS:
1. From HOME, tap SYSTEM STORE/RECALL, then tap SYSTEM PRESETS.
2. Select each Frame you wish to recall the preset into by tapping Module or Groups icons.
Selected Frames are identified by a green icon.
3. Tap QUICK RECALL.
Orange equals active; blue equals inactive.
4. Tap a preset location from the scroll bar.
5. Repeat the previous step to compare with other SYSTEM PRESETS
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
69
System Store Recall Menu Reference
Confirmation/warning messages are not displayed in Quick Recall (except for configuration between
Contour & Mesa). Tapping the preset location immediately recalls the selected system preset.
6.10.4 Storing over an Existing Preset
STORE instead of NEW STORE. The data in the preset location of the selected Frames will be replaced by the current system configuration.
6.10.5 Clearing a Preset Location
To clear a system preset location from multiple Lake devices:
1. From HOME, tap SYSTEM STORE/RECALL, then tap SYSTEM PRESETS.
2. Select each Frame you wish to clear the preset from by tapping Module or Groups icons.
Selected Frames are identified by a green icon.
3. Tap the preset location that you wish to clear from the scroll bar.
4. Tap CLEAR, then OK to the warning messages.
6.10.6 Preset Mismatch
If one or more of the selected Frames contains a different configuration in a particular preset location,
PRESET MISMATCH displays as the name for that system preset location.
A mismatch occurs if different configurations are stored separately in the same Preset location across different Lake devices, and these devices are selected together in the SYSTEM PRESET menu.
To correct a preset mismatch status, either empty the preset location using the CLEAR function, or use the
STORE WITH NEW NAME function to store the data of the current system configuration into all selected
Frames.
The RECALL and STORE buttons will be disabled when a location is selected for multiple Frames that contain a preset mismatch.
70
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7. EQ/Levels Menu Reference
The EQ/Levels functionality of the Lake Controller provides a sophisticated and accurate real-time interface to both Modules and Groups on the network. Modules and Groups require different features and functions for setup and configuration, although they provide the same EQ and level functionality for system optimization and during the show.
7.1 EQ/Levels Overview
access to the underlying signal processing parameters.
Figure 7-1: EQ/Levels Overview
Modules, Super Modules, and Groups use the EQ/Levels interface to present gain, polarity, delay, limiter,
EQ, crossover, and auxiliary output parameters to the sound engineer. When adjusting any of these parameters from a Module, the sound engineer makes changes to a single Module on the network. When adjusting any of these parameters from a Group, the sound engineer makes changes simultaneously to a
Group of Modules on the network.
This chapter provides a menu reference for EQ/Levels functionality, which can be accessed from multiple locations within the Controller.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
71
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.1.1 General Access
The EQ/LEVELS button accesses the following information:
▸
Module and Group parametric EQ (PEQ)
▸
Module and Group graphic EQ (GEQ)
▸
Module and Group levels (gain, delays, limiters, etc.)
▸
Module crossovers and high-pass filter/low-pass filter (HPF/LPF) (Contour) or HPF/LPF only (Mesa EQ)
The EQ/Levels functions can be accessed by several methods from the following menu locations:
▸ HOME
▸ MODULES
▸ GROUPS
▸ SOLO/MUTE
▸ I/O CONFIG
Tap a Module/Group icon once
Select a Module/Group icon, then tap the EQ/Levels button
Select a Module/Group icon, then tap the EQ/Levels button
Select a Module/Group icon, then tap the EQ/Levels button
Tap a section of the interactive block diagram
7.1.2 Restricted Access
The Lake Controller provides security by allowing a system designer to hide parts of the system or set them to View Only. This can be done globally in a system, or for individual Modules. This security specification
further details.
7.1.3 Group Adjustments
Group EQ and levels are in “view only” mode when viewing via a Module. To adjust Group EQ or levels, access the Group EQ/Levels page via the Group icon.
Groups do not have a Xover or HPF/LPF page.
However, the Gang Xover/Aux/HPF/LPF functions, available from the Groups menu, can be used to link the Xover/Aux/HPF/LPF for all Modules in a Group.
72
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.1.4 Default Settings
The following example shows the available screens and default EQ overlays for a Contour loudspeaker
Module placed on the Main page of the Lake Controller.
Figure 7-2: Default Screen Tabs for Contour Loudspeaker Module
The default Module contains a Classic 3-Way (CL3way) crossover. The default tabs for this Module are:
▸ LEVELS Displays gain, delay and limiters
▸ XOVER Displays crossover and output EQ settings
▸ PEQ1
▸ GEQ2
Parametric EQ overlay
Graphic EQ overlay
Tap the LEVELS tab to toggle between LEVELS and the XOVER / EQ screens.
These four screen tabs cannot be deleted, but they can be hidden if required. Please refer to the
Designer Mode chapter in this manual for further details.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
73
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.2 Levels
Figure 7-3: Levels Screen Overview
Table 7-1 on page 75 provides definitions for the labels in Figure 7-3 above.
Level Limits
All levels are subject to limits set by the system designer. If you are unable to change a value to the desired level, this may be due to restrictions set for that channel.
Hidden Output Channels
A system designer may choose to hide an output channel if it is not being used. It is possible that the number of visible output channels will differ from the number suggested by the Module type.
74
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Label Function
A
B
C
D
E
F
Parameter Values
Limiter Indicator
Frame/Module/Group Label
Fader
Additional Outputs
Peak Level / Peak Hold
Description
For Modules, the value presented in brackets represents the overall parameter value, which includes any Groups the Module is assigned to. The bottom value (in the blue box) represents the value of the Module parameter.
The Group parameter value is shown in the blue edit box.
Indicates the total RMS and peak limiting gain reduction with an orange bar that moves downward as gain reduction increases.
Modules display the selected Module’s name.
Groups display the name of the Module providing metering.
Drag the fader up or down to adjust its level. Drag below, above, or to the left of the fader to adjust by smaller increments.
For a 4-, 5-, or 6-Way/Aux Module, additional output channels appear here. The number of output channels depends on the
Module type.
Indicates peak level with a thin green bar, and peak hold with a wide orange segment.
G RMS Level Indicator Indicates RMS level with a wide green bar.
The channel label is user defined. The color and label of the mute button identifies the mute status of the channel:
A blue UNMUTED button = channel unmuted
A red MUTED button = channel muted
H
Input Channel
Label Mute Button
Polarity Button
Modules: A red button with blue text denotes the channel has been muted by a Group the Module is assigned to. The polarity button for the channel is located to the right of the mute button.
I
J
K
Input Mixer
Input Router Mutes
Events & Control
L Levels Menu Button Bar
Groups: An orange button with blue text denotes that at least one
Module in that Group has the channel muted. A red mute button with blue text denotes the channel is muted on all Modules in the
Group. The polarity button is not available at Group level.
Modules only - provides access to the Input Mixer, which allows audio input channel from available Input Routers to be enabled, disabled, and mixed as required.
Modules only - provides access to the Input Router Mutes, which will affect any Module on a device using selected Input Router.
LM & PLM Only - opens a screen containing product specific event logging and other features.
The functions and submenus available on the Levels screens are described throughout in this section.
Table 7-1: Function Descriptions for Levels Screen
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
75
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.2.1 Gain
Tap GAIN to display the gain levels for each channel of the selected Module/Group. To adjust gain values, drag the fader (D) for large increments, drag above or below the fader for fine adjustment, or tap the value
(A) for keyboard entry.
7.2.2 Delay
Tap DELAY to display the delay time for each channel of the selected Module/Group. Delay values can be adjusted in four ways:
▸
Drag the fader (D) to adjust by large increments
▸
Drag above or below the fader for fine adjustment
▸
Drag on the meter to the left of the fader for very fine adjustment
▸
Tap the delay value (A) for keyboard entry
A total delay of 2,000 ms (input plus output) can be set, subject to level limits set by the system designer.
7.2.3 LimiterMax
™
Tap the LIMITERMAX button to view a submenu containing functions relating to the MaxRMS and MaxPeak limiters.
7.2.3.1 MaxRMS Level
Tap MAXRMS LEVEL to display the maximum RMS signal level (dB) allowed at the output. An orange bar moves downward from the top of the channel meter to indicate the limiting amount. To adjust Limiter
MaxRMS values, drag the fader (D) for large increments, drag above or below the fader for fine adjustment, or tap the value (A) for keyboard entry.
The MaxRMS Level value is relative to the factory MaxRMS value (dBu). While dragging the fader, the total value is displayed in the status bar as dBu-rms, dBV-rms and Vrms.
7.2.3.2 MaxRMS Corner
MaxRMS Corner applies to Modules only; this function is inactive if a Group is selected.
This limiter corner function softens MaxRMS limiting by creating a curve that gradually introduces limiting.
This function is similar to an audio compressor’s knee function. For example, if MaxRMS Level equals –6
76
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
dB and Limiter Corner equals –4 dB, limiting begins gradually when the Max RMS level reaches –10 dB and increases until maximum limiting occurs at –6 dB.
Tap MAXRMS CORNER to display the value (dB) for each channel of the selected Module. To adjust, drag the fader (D) or tap the value (A) for keyboard entry.
7.2.3.3 MaxRMS Attack and MaxRMS Release
MaxRMS Attack MaxRMS Release apply only to Modules; these functions are inactive if a Group is selected.
The attack and release times (also referred to as ‘time constants’) determine the time in milliseconds that the MaxRMS Limiter takes to fully engage and disengage once the MaxRMS Corner level has been reached.
Tap MAXRMS ATTACK or MAXRMS RELEASE to display the value (ms) for each channel of the selected
Module. To adjust the value, drag the fader (D) or tap the value (A) for keyboard entry.
7.2.3.4 Auto Time Constant
The MaxRMS attack and release values may be set manually by the user, or may be calculated automatically. Automatic calculation is determined by the crossover frequency of the channel’s high-pass filter, if applicable. Otherwise, it is fixed at 160 ms.
The TC AUTO button is displayed underneath the slider when viewing either the attack or release settings.
When TC AUTO is enabled (Orange), the slider is disabled and the attack or release values are calculated automatically.
Figure 7-4: Tc Auto Attack and Release Controls
7.2.3.5 MaxPeak Level
Tap MAXPEAK LEVEL to display the maximum peak signal level (dB) allowed at the output.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
77
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
The MaxPeak limiter process is disabled when the total MaxPeak level (including Group and factory settings) is 25 dBu or greater.
An orange bar moves downward from the top of the channel meter to indicate the limiting amount. To adjust
Limiter MaxPeak values, drag the fader (D) for large increments, drag above or below the fader for fine adjustment, or tap the value (A) for keyboard entry.
The MaxPeak Level value is relative to the factory MaxPeak value (dBu-pk). While dragging the fader, the total value is displayed in the status bar as dBu-pk, dBV-pk, and Vpk
7.2.4 Input Headroom
This function is available only for Modules on the Contour Pro 26 and Mesa Quad EQ. Input Headroom is configured via I/O CONFIG > INPUT CONFIGURATION for all other products, and is not available for Groups.
To adjust input headroom values, drag the fader (D) for large increments, drag above or below the fader for fine adjustment, or tap the value (A) for keyboard entry.
7.2.5 Enable Mute
This button locks and unlocks the mute buttons and is active by default (that is, muting or unmuting is allowed). When the button is active (orange), channel muting via the Controller is enabled. When the button is inactive (blue), channel muting is disabled.
7.2.6 Enable Polarity
This button locks or unlocks the polarity buttons and is inactive by default (polarity buttons locked). When the button is active (orange), the polarity can be changed. When the button is inactive (blue), the polarity cannot be changed.
If a system designer has locked polarity changes on one or more outputs, the polarity button for the outputs will not be displayed in User mode.
7.2.7 Label Channel
This function applies to Modules only and is inactive if a Group is selected. Channel labels for Groups are derived from the Module that has been assigned for metering purposes as just described.
The channel label is a user-defined value that appears on the mute button at the bottom of each channel, the Module I/O CONFIG page, and on any auxiliary output EQ tabs.
78
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
To label a channel:
1. Access a Module levels page through a Module icon.
2. Tap LABEL CHANNEL, then tap the required channel label/mute button.
3. Enter the channel label using the on-screen keyboard (or an external keyboard).
4. Tap LABEL CHANNEL to exit this mode.
7.2.8 Meter Options
Tap the METER OPTIONS button to view a submenu containing functions relating to alternate meter views and system designer features.
7.2.8.1 Input +4dBu Reference
Tap INPUT +4dBu REFERENCE to view the physical input signal meter relative to +4 dBu.
Tap the button again to return to the default Digital Clip [DClip] view.
The DClip metering mode shows the audio level prior to any gain adjustment (input headroom, or digital gain offset), and indicates when the A/D converters will clip. The +4 dBu metering mode shows the audio level after any gain adjustment, and is useful for comparing levels of different input signals prior to processing.
This is a global function; all physical input meters throughout the system display the reference selected here.
7.2.8.2 Pre Limiter
Tap the PRE LIMITER button to view the pre-limiter output signals. Tap again to return to post-limiter mode.
This is a global function; all meters throughout the system display the reference selected here.
The limiter status is identified on the bottom right of each output meter above the channel label/mute button.
7.2.8.3 AmpClip Reference
Tap the AMPCLIP REFERENCE button to view output signals with respect to the AmpClip reference level.
Tap again to return to the normal view, which is relative to the factory MaxRMS level as defined using
Designer Mode.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
79
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
When AMPCLIP REFERENCE is selected, the Amp Clip level is used as the reference for the 0 dB level on the meter. With correct settings, the output meter will identify the onset of clipping.
AMPCLIP REFERENCE is a global function; all meters throughout the system display the reference selected here.
7.2.8.4 Assign Meters
The ASSIGN METERS function is active only when a Group levels page is accessed via a Group icon. For metering purposes, a Module may be assigned to a Group. This provides an overview of the input/output signals for that Group.
When a Group is created, the first Module to be assigned to that Group is assigned to metering automatically.
To assign a Module to a Group for metering purposes:
1. Access a Group LEVELS page through a Group icon.
2. Tap METER OPTIONS, then tap ASSIGN METERS.
3. The Module scroll bar appears displaying Modules assigned to the selected Group.
4. On the scroll bar, tap the Module you wish to use for metering.
5. Tap ASSIGN METERS again, then METER OPTIONS EXIT to exit this mode
7.2.8.5 AmpClip
AmpClip provides a parameter for scaling the output metering of the Lake device to calibrate the clipping point to a given amplifier’s sensitivity. This value (the AmpClip reference level) is set in dBu and is a sum of the factory AmpClip value (dBu) and the user AmpClip value (dB).
In both AmpClip Reference and MaxRMS Reference metering modes, the output peak meters will turn red
at the AmpClip reference level to indicate possible output clipping as shown in Figure 7-5.
80
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Figure 7-5: AmpClip Level Indicators
7.2.8.6 Level Limits
This function button is visible only in Designer Mode, and is used for setting minimum and maximum values for all Levels attributes described in this chapter.
7.2.8.7 Adjust Factory
This function button is visible only in Designer Mode and is used for defining default level settings and level limits for all attributes described in this chapter.
7.3 EQ
The Controller has two types of input EQ: Parametric EQ and Graphic EQ. Additional parametric output EQ is available on the XOVER page and Aux tabs. This section deals with input EQ.
Groups and Modules can have multiple layers of EQ, called EQ overlays. Each Module can have up to eight
EQ overlays, and each Group can have up to four EQ overlays. A Module can have up to 256 input EQ filters distributed amongst these EQ overlays. Although this may sound extreme, the large number of filters is necessary in order to allow for sophisticated Grouping of Graphic EQ overlays.
A Module’s overall input EQ response is calculated by combining its input EQ overlays with those of all
Groups to which that Module is assigned. The resulting composite EQ curve is indicated by a white line that is displayed on all overlays.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
81
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Figure 7-6: Composite EQ Curve
7.3.1 Default Overlays
Modules and Groups both use the same EQ overlays and EQ functions. If a Module is assigned to a Group, the Group EQ overlays can be viewed from the Module but cannot be updated. Changes to Group EQ are performed by accessing the Group’s controls.
By default, a Module has parametric (PEQ1) and graphic EQ (GEQ2); a Group has a single parametric EQ
(PEQ1). A small gray dot to the bottom right of these OVERLAY LABELs signifies they are default overlays that cannot be removed.
Figure 7-7: PEQ1 Tab
7.3.2 Hidden Overlays
A system designer can:
▸ Hide specific overlays
▸ Hide all overlays throughout the system
▸ Set specific overlays to View Only
▸ Set all overlays to View Only
It is important to be aware that there may be an overlay present that affects the overall EQ curve, but is not accessible by the end user
7.3.3 Parametric EQ Screen
Figure 7-8 shows a parametric EQ (PEQ1) screen, including letters marking its key functions.
82
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Figure 7-8: Parametric EQ Screen
Table 7-2 on page 84 describes the functions labelled in Figure 7-8 above.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
83
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Label Function
A
B
C
D
E
Frequency Lock
A/B
Filter Box
Low Shelf Filter
Parametric Filter
Mesa Filter
F High Shelf Filter
G Module Icon
H Filter Shape EQ Curve
I EQ Tool (Left Side)
J EQ Tool (Center)
K EQ Tool (Flat Top)
L EQ Tool (Right Side)
M EQ Menu Button Bar
Description
If FREQUENCY LOCK is blue then filter frequency is unlocked; the frequency is locked if the button is orange. When locked, the frequency can only be adjusted using the EQ Tool (J).
Tap the A/B button to create a bypassed copy of the selected overlay for fast EQ comparison.
Displays the frequency, bandwidth, and gain values of each filter.
Tap a filter box to select a particular filter.
Double-tap the filter box to switch to Fine Adjustment mode.
Drag the filter box down to bypass the filter.
Drag the filter box up to insert.
Drag the filter box off the top of the screen to delete.
Boost/cut low frequencies. The shelf filter can be adjusted from very shallow to extremely steep filter slopes.
Boost/cut a specified frequency band, from one-tenth of an octave to multiple octaves of bandwidth.
The unique Mesa filter contains two filter points that can be adjusted on either side to create a steep peak or a gentle slope with a variable-width flat-top frequency response.
Boost/cut high frequencies. The shelf filter can be adjusted from very shallow to extremely steep filter slopes.
Displays the currently selected Module and status information.
The selected filter is highlighted in light blue. The overall EQ curve is identified by a white line.
Adjusts the filter bandwidth for parametric, Mesa, and high-shelf filters by dragging left or right.
Changes the frequency of the selected filter by dragging left or right.
Drag left or right at this point on either side of (J) to adjust the flat top width of the Mesa filter.
Adjusts the filter octave width for parametric, Mesa, and lowshelf filters by dragging left or right.
The functions and submenus available on the EQ overlays are described in the following sections.
Table 7-2: Function Descriptions for Parametric EQ Screen
84
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
To add an EQ filter to a parametric EQ overlay:
1. Tap the required parametric EQ shape (C, D, E, or F).
2. Tap again anywhere on the EQ curve (H).
3. Boost/cut the frequency gain by dragging the filter point up or down.
If a mouse with a wheel is attached to the computer, you can use the wheel to adjust the gain of the selected filter.
4. Adjust the frequency by dragging the filter point left or right.
If FREQUENCY LOCK (A) is active (orange), you cannot adjust the frequency by dragging the filter point in the main EQ overlay display. Deactivate FREQUENCY LOCK (A) or use the EQ Tool (J) to adjust frequency.
7.3.4 Graphic EQ Screen
along with letters marking its key functions.
Figure 7-9: Graphic EQ Overlay
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
85
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Label Function
A
B
Frequency Lock
A/B
Filter Box
Description
If FREQUENCY LOCK is blue then filter frequency is unlocked; the frequency is locked if the button is orange. When locked, the frequency can only be adjusted using the EQ Tool (J).
Tap the A/B button to create a bypassed copy of the selected overlay for fast EQ comparison.
Displays the frequency, bandwidth, and gain values of each filter.
Tap a filter box to select a particular filter.
Double-tap the filter box to switch to Fine Adjustment mode.
Drag the filter box down to bypass the filter.
Drag the filter box up to insert.
Drag the filter box off the top of the screen to delete.
Describes the currently selected Module and status.
C Frame & Module Label
D EQ Curve
E EQ Tool
A white line identifies the overall EQ curve.
Drag the EQ Tool left or right to select the frequency to change.
Table 7-3: Function Descriptions for Graphic EQ Screen
To add graphic EQ:
1. Select the filter point to adjust using the EQ Tool (E).
2. Drag the filter point up or down to increase or decrease gain.
If FREQUENCY LOCK (A) is inactive, you can also tap a filter point to select it and drag up or down to adjust the gain.
7.3.5 Input EQ Menu Reference
The button bar presented while viewing the Input EQ display provides a number of applicable functions for adjusting EQ and configuring EQ overlays.
Figure 7-10: EQ/Levels Menu
OVERLAY FUNCTIONS, immediately to the right of the EQ/LEVELS button, provides a submenu with the following items:
Figure 7-11: Overlay Functions Menu
86
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.3.5.1 Overlay Properties/EQ Preferences
In User Mode, the only function active under the OVERLAY PROPERTIES menu is EQ PREFERENCES, which provides a submenu containing functions that control the view of the EQ scale and screens.
Separate settings can be stored for crossover EQ and input/auxiliary EQ. Therefore, most changes made using OVERLAY PROPERTIES/EQ PREFERENCES affect only the input and auxiliary output EQ scales.
Function
No Scale [F2]
Reset Scale [F3]
Zoom In [F4]
Zoom Out [F5]
EQ Pref Exit [F6]
Full Response [F7]
Up [F8]
Down [F9]
Description
Removes the scale lines on all EQ/Crossover and Auxiliary screens.
Resets the EQ scale to the default setting of ±15 dB.
Zooms the EQ scale in by 3 dB increments (for example, if scale is ±15 dB, tapping Zoom In will change the scale to ±12 dB).
Zooms the EQ scale out by 3 dB increments (for example, if scale is ±15 dB, tapping Zoom Out will change the scale to ±18 dB).
Returns the previous menu level.
Available only for Crossover and Auxiliary Output screens. When active
(orange), the overall EQ curve is shown taking into account all crossovers, HPF,
LPF, input and output EQ for the Module and any Groups it is assigned to. Not applicable for input EQ screens (PEQ/GEQ).
Moves the zero line up in 3 dB increments.
Moves the zero line down in 3 dB increments.
Table 7-4: Function
Descriptions for EQ Preferences Menu
7.3.5.2 Overlay Hide/Overlay View Only
These functions are active only when in Designer Mode. Please refer to chapter 18.
7.3.5.3 Overlay GEQ/Overlay PEQ
This button’s label changes depending on the currently selected overlay type.
If a parametric EQ (PEQ) overlay is selected, the button reads OVERLAY GEQ. Tapping it flattens all PEQ and converts the overlay to a graphic EQ.
If a graphic EQ (GEQ) overlay is selected, the button reads OVERLAY PEQ. Tapping it flattens all GEQ and converts the overlay to a parametric EQ.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
87
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.3.5.4 Overlay Delete
OVERLAY DELETE is inactive for the default overlays. An overlay created by a user may be deleted by selecting the overlay and tapping OVERLAY DELETE. If the overlay contains filters, a warning message will be displayed.
7.3.5.5 Overlay Copy
Tap OVERLAY COPY to copy the selected overlay. This function is used in conjunction with
OVERLAY PASTE OVER.
7.3.5.6 Overlay New
Tap OVERLAY NEW to create a new PEQ overlay. This can be changed to a GEQ overlay if required, refer to
Each Module can have up to eight overlays; Groups can have up to four overlays.
7.3.5.7 Overlay Paste Over
After using the OVERLAY COPY action, tapping OVERLAY PASTE OVER pastes the copied data into the selected overlay, overwriting its previous content.
7.3.5.8 Overlay Label
An Overlay Label is a user-defined value that appears on the overlay tab at the top of the screen.
To label an overlay:
1. Tap the desired overlay tab.
2. Tap OVERLAY LABEL.
3. Enter the label name using the on-screen keyboard (or an external keyboard).
4. Tap OK.
88
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.3.6 Overlay Bypass/Overlay Insert/Overlay Compare
This button’s label changes depending on whether the selected overlay is currently active or bypassed.
If the overlay is active, the button reads OVERLAY BYPASS. Tap the button to bypass the overlay. A bypassed overlay is displayed at the bottom of the screen, just above the button bar.
If the overlay is bypassed, the button reads OVERLAY INSERT. Tap the button to insert the overlay. An active overlay is displayed at the top of the screen.
If a bypassed overlay is placed directly underneath an active overlay, the button reads OVERLAY COMPARE.
An overlay can be bypassed by dragging the overlay tab downwards or inserted by dragging upwards. In
A/B mode, dragging up or down swaps the active/ bypassed overlays.
7.3.6.1 A/B Overlay Compare
In addition to the bypass feature, you can compare two overlays within a Module or Group. The two ways to create an A/B comparison are described in the following sections.
7.3.6.2 Using the A/B Button
The A/B button at the top left of the screen creates a bypassed copy of the selected overlay. Changes can then be made to one of the overlays, and compared by tapping OVERLAY COMPARE.
7.3.6.3 Comparing Existing Overlays
Follow this process to compare two existing EQ overlays:
1. Tap overlay A to select it.
2. Tap OVERLAY BYPASS. Overlay A moves to the bottom of the screen.
3. Tap and drag overlay A left or right along the bottom of the screen until it is aligned directly underneath the EQ overlay you wish to compare.
4. Tap OVERLAY COMPARE.
Each time the button is tapped, the two overlays switch positions; the top overlay is active and the bottom is bypassed.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
89
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.3.7 Overlay Flat
Tap OVERLAY FLAT to flatten and delete all filters from the selected overlay. This function is inactive if the selected overlay does not contain any filters.
7.3.8 Filter Bypass/Filter Insert
The button label changes depending on whether the selected filter is active or bypassed. The button reads:
FILTER BYPASS: If the filter is active; tap to bypass the filter.
FILTER INSERT: If the filter is bypassed; tap to insert the filter.
The FILTER EDIT box of a bypassed filter is positioned slightly lower than an active filter’s edit box and does not have a yellow border when selected.
A filter can be bypassed/inserted by dragging the filter edit box down (bypass) or up (insert).
7.3.9 Filter Flat
Tap FILTER FLAT to flatten the selected filter. This sets the filter gain to zero, but frequency and bandwidth remain unchanged.
FILTER FLAT is inactive if the selected overlay does not contain any filters.
7.3.10 Filter Delete
Tap FILTER DELETE to remove the selected filter from the overlay.
A PEQ filter can be deleted by dragging the filter box upward off the screen
FILTER DELETE is inactive if the selected overlay is a:
▸
Graphic EQ, because its filter points are fixed and cannot be deleted
▸
Parametric EQ overlay without any filters
90
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.3.11 Filter Edit
This function allows manual entry of gain (dB), frequency (Hz), and bandwidth (octave) for the selected filter.
If a PEQ overlay is selected and the FILTER EDIT button is pressed, the parametric shapes are replaced with the values of the selected filter
Figure 7-12: Manual Filter Edit Options
To adjust filter parameters using FILTER EDIT:
1. Tap the overlay to select it.
2. Tap the filter box, or use the EQ Tool to select the filter.
3. Tap FILTER EDIT.
4. Tap the gain, frequency, or bandwidth value (highlighted in blue).
5. Enter the value required using the on-screen keyboard (or an external keyboard), and tap OK. The
FILTER EDIT function is inactive if the selected overlay does not contain any filters.
High-frequency values can be entered using k to denote kHz, instead of Hz (for example, 12k instead of 12,000 Hz).
7.3.12 Analyzer Ready / Analyzer Unavailable
The Lake Controller can interface directly with certain audio analyzer software programs that are installed on the same computer, or on another computer on the same network.
When the analyzer is enabled, and a compatible audio analyzer is online and on the same network, the
Lake Controller provides spectrum, spectrograph, and transfer function displays on the XOVER, Aux, and EQ overlays.
If a compatible analyzer is identified on the network this button will read ANALYZER READY, otherwise the button will read ANALYZER UNAVAILABLE.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
91
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.3.13 High-Precision Filter Adjustments
Double-tap the filter parameters box so it turns from its normal appearance to a gray outline and gray text.
This switches from Normal Adjustment to Fine Adjustment mode. To return to Normal Adjustment mode, tap the filter box once. Fine Adjustment mode is also implemented globally when Show mode is selected.
7.4 Crossovers and HPF/LPF
The XOVER and HPF/LPF screens display the crossover and/or HPF/LPF information for the selected
Module, depending on the Module type. The XOVER and HPF/LPF screens do not apply to Groups.
To view the XOVER screen:
1. Access EQ/LEVELS, and tap the EQ page tab at the top left of the screen.
2. Tap the XOVER or HPF/LPF tab next to Levels at the top of screen.
Figure 7-13 shows the XOVER screen along with letters marking key functions that are described in
Figure 7-13: Xover Screen
92
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Label Function
A
Frequency Lock
HPF Enable
B Low Shelf Filter(Xover/Aux)
Description
Frequency Lock is relevant only to parametric filters (B, C, and D).
When button is blue, the filter frequency is unlocked. When the button is orange, the filter frequency is locked (i.e. can only be adjusted with the EQ Tool).
HPF Enable activates or deactivates the high-pass filter (HPF).
When button is blue the HPF is disabled, when orange the HPF is enabled.
Used to boost/cut low frequencies.
C Parametric Filter (Xover/Aux) Used to boost/cut a specific frequency band.
D High Shelf Filter (Xover/Aux)
E Filter Edit Box
F
Module/Frame Labels and
Selected Output Channel Label
G
H
I
J
K
L
Low Output Frequency Range
(Selected)
Mid Output Frequency Range
High Output Frequency Range
Crossover/Filter Point
Crossover Selector
Crossover Menu Button Bar
Used to boost/cut high frequencies.
Displays the crossover or HPF/LPF center frequency and type, or the details of any EQ filters on the selected output.
This area of the screen displays the Frame and Module labels and the selected output label.
The lowest frequency output of the crossover. This output channel is the currently selected crossover filter, identified by light green shading. A solid white line identifies the frequency response of this output channel.
The pass band crossover that is currently not selected, as identified by dark green shading.
The highest frequency output of the crossover.
For a two-way Module, the Xover screen displays two crossover channels instead of three.
An X marks the frequency at which the output filters cross over.
Parametric filter points are also identified by a red (selected) or yellow (not selected). Only filter points/filter boxes for the selected output are displayed.
This is used to change the crossover frequency and to select the side of the crossover you wish to affect. Light green denotes the selected half, and dark green is not selected. When a PEQ filter is selected, the crossover selector changes to the blue EQ filter tool.
The functions and submenus available on the Xover page are described in the following sections.
Table 7-5: Function Descriptions for Xover Screen
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
93
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.4.1 Using the High-pass Filter (HPF Enable)
The high-pass filter filters all frequencies below the specified frequency. Input HPF and Low Output HPF are available. Input HPF affects all output channels; Low Output HPF affects only the lowest output of the
Module. These two different modes of operation are provided in order to satisfy the requirements of various loudspeaker manufacturers’ required signal-processing configurations.
To set the Low Output HPF:
1. Tap HPF ENABLE, then tap HPF Select.
2. Select a filter from the scroll bar (24 dB or less).
3. Tap HPF Set, then YES to the warning message.
To change the HPF to affect all outputs (Input HPF):
1. Tap CROSSOVER FUNCTIONS, then HPF Functions.
2. Tap INPUT HPF.
While in this mode, move the HPF center frequency, and note how it affects all outputs of the Module
The center frequency of the HPF can be set to a minimum of 10 Hz using the Filter Edit function.
7.4.2 Using EQ Filters on the Xover Screen
The XOVER screen provides low-shelf (B), parametric (C), and high-shelf (D) filters to shape the audio from each output as required. When used on the XOVER screen, the parametric EQ filters affect only the selected output.
Only EQ filter points and filter boxes of the selected output are displayed. To select an output, tap the associated green filter box and toggle between outputs using the crossover tool.
A. Letter-labeled references in this example are used in the subsequent instructions.
94
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Figure 7-14: Using Output EQ Filters on the Xover Screen
Although this parametric filter crosses the range used by all outputs, it affects only the range of the selected output. The curved white line identifies the effect the parametric filter has on output 1.
To add parametric EQ to an output:
1. Tap the required crossover filter box (F) to select the crossover.
2. Use the crossover tool to select the required output of the crossover (light green is selected).
3. Tap an EQ filter (B, C, or D), and tap again in middle of screen.
4. Boost/cut the frequency gain by dragging the filter point (G) up/down.
5. Adjust the frequency by dragging the filter point (G) left or right. If FREQUENCY LOCK (A) is active (orange), you cannot change the frequency by dragging the filter point. Either deactivate
FREQUENCY LOCK or use the EQ Tool (I) to change the frequency.
6. Adjust the bandwidth by dragging to the left or right of the shape tool (J).
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
95
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.4.3 Linear Phase Crossovers
the XOVER screen for a Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way Module (LP4way).
Figure 7-15: Linear Phase Crossover Screen
While most of the button bar functions are the same, some XOVER menu options and functions are different for linear phase Modules. These differences are identified in the following sections.
7.4.4 Crossover Functions
CROSSOVER FUNCTIONS provides a submenu containing the following functions:
7.4.4.1 HPF/LPF Functions
▸ HPF/LPF FUNC EXIT exits this menu and returns to the CROSSOVER FUNCTIONS menu.
▸ INPUT HPF SETs the HPF to affect all output channels for the Module (depending on the frequency of the HPF and outputs). Applicable to Contour Modules only.
96
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
▸
LOW OUTPUT HPF SETs the HPF to affect only the lowest output channel of the selected Module.
Applicable to Contour Modules only.
▸ HPF ENABLE enables/disables the HPF for the selected Module.
▸ LPF ENABLE enables/disables the LPF on the highest output channel for the selected Module.
INPUT HPF and LOW OUTPUT HPF are disabled for the Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way Module. The
LP4way HPF is fixed to INPUT HPF. Other Module types, incl. LP2/LP3way provide the HPF option.
7.4.4.2 Crossover Hide
Available only in Designer Mode. When enabled (orange), the crossover page will be hidden when the
Module is locked, or after exiting from Designer Mode.
7.4.4.3 Crossover View Only
Available only in Designer Mode. When enabled (orange), the crossover page will be set as view only when the Module is locked, or after exiting from Designer Mode.
7.4.4.4 EQ Preferences
This provides a submenu containing options regarding the view of the EQ scale.
7.4.4.5 Crossover Copy
Copies all crossover and EQ settings from the selected XOVER or HPF/LPF page.
7.4.4.6 Crossover Paste
Active only when a crossover or HPF/LPF page has previously been copied and the current Module is the same type.
A crossover can only be pasted to a Module of the same number of channels and the same type. For example, a Classic 3-Way crossover can only be pasted into another Classic 3-Way crossover; the HPF/
LPF of a Mesa EQ Module can only be pasted onto another Mesa EQ HPF/LPF page; and a Classic 4-Way crossover cannot be pasted into a Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
97
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
CROSSOVER COPY and CROSSOVER PASTE only transfer the crossover and output EQ settings.
Levels and input EQ (PEQ/GEQ) will not be transferred to the destination Module.
7.4.5 Crossover Split/Crossover Combine/Alignment Delay
This button’s label depends on the state of the currently selected crossover and the Module type. A classic crossover Module will read CROSSOVER SPLIT / CROSSOVER COMBINE; a linear phase Module will read
ALIGNMENT DELAY.
7.4.5.1 Crossover Split
The label reads CROSSOVER SPLIT when a filter box is selected for a classic crossover that is currently combined. This function separates the HPF and LPF of a classic crossover, enabling independent adjustment of the crossover frequency and type.
To split a crossover, tap a crossover filter box, then tap CROSSOVER SPLIT.
CROSSOVER SPLIT is not applicable for linear phase crossovers.
7.4.5.2 Crossover Combine
The label reads CROSSOVER COMBINE when a filter box is selected for a classic crossover that is currently split. This function joins the separated classic crossover filters together based on the frequency and type of the currently selected filter.
To combine a previously split crossover, select the crossover filter box you wish to use, then tap
CROSSOVER COMBINE.
CROSSOVER COMBINE is not applicable for linear phase crossovers.
98
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.4.5.3 Alignment Delay
A linear phase response requires considerable processing; the Alignment Delay function allows a linear phase response to be used in different circumstances depending on the maximum delay that can be permitted in conjunction with the crossover slope.
Steeper low-frequency linear phase crossovers can be calculated with a longer alignment delay. If a steep low-frequency linear phase crossover is not required, a shorter alignment delay can be utilized.
The label on this button reads Alignment Delay for linear phase crossovers, and is not applicable for Classic crossovers or other Module types.
To change Alignment Delay settings:
1. Tap ALIGNMENT DELAY. The currently selected delay setting is highlighted in orange.
2. Tap the required delay setting. A shorter alignment delay equals a shallower linear phase crossover transition band slope. A longer alignment delay equals a steeper linear phase crossover transition band slope.
LP2way and LP3way Modules use different Alignment Delay settings than the LP4way.
Table 7-6 shows the highest and lowest frequencies available for the Linear Phase Brick Wall 2/3-Way
Modules, along with associated roll-off per octave at these settings.
Alignment
Delay
1.25 ms
2.50 ms
5.00 ms
10.0 ms
20.0 ms
40.0 ms
Lowest
Frequency
500 Hz
250 Hz
dB/Octave
13.61
11.04
Highest
Frequency
12 kHz
12 kHz
dB/Octave
93.37
93.37
93.37
125 Hz 11.01
12 kHz
62.5 Hz 11.03
12 kHz
32.5 Hz 10.84
12 kHz
32.4 Hz 14.47
12 kHz
Table 7-6: Linear Phase Brick Wall 2/3-Way
93.37
93.37
93.37
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
99
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Alignment
Delay
1.25 ms
2.50 ms
Lowest
Frequency
Highest
Frequency
1.03 kHz 6.022 kHz
515 Hz 6.022 kHz
5.00 ms 258 Hz 6.022 kHz
10.0 ms
20.0 ms
129 Hz
32.5 Hz
6.022 kHz
6.022 kHz
40.0 ms 31.6 Hz 6.022 kHz
Table 7-7: Linear Phase 24 dB/Octave 2/3-Way
Alignment
Delay
1.25 ms
2.50 ms
Lowest
Frequency
Highest
Frequency
1.03 kHz 8.501 kHz
515 Hz 8.501 kHz
5.00 ms 258 Hz 8.501 kHz
10.0 ms
20.0 ms
129 Hz
32.5 Hz
8.501 kHz
8.501 kHz
40.0 ms 31.6 Hz 8.501 kHz
Table 7-8: Linear Phase 48 dB/Octave 2/3-Way
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Table 7-9 shows the highest and lowest frequencies available for the Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way
(LP4way), along with associated roll-off per octave at these settings.
Alignment
Delay
3.15 ms
Lowest
Frequency
220 Hz
6.29 ms 110 Hz
12.58 ms 62.5 Hz
dB/Octave
13.61
Highest
Frequency
16 kHz
13.61
13.56
16 kHz
16 kHz
dB/Octave
> 180
> 180
> 180
25.17 ms 62.5 Hz 24.58
16 kHz
Table 7-9: Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way
> 180
7.4.6 Crossover/HPF/LPF Select
7.4.6.1 Crossover Select
This button reads CROSSOVER SELECT and is active only when a crossover filter box is selected on a
Classic crossover or a Linear Phase 2/3-Way. This function is not available for the Linear Phase Brick Wall
4-Way Module.
Tap CROSSOVER SELECT to display a scroll bar containing available crossover types. For a Classic crossover, the following scroll bar displays.
Figure 7-16: Classic Crossover Selection
For a Linear Phase 2-/3-Way crossover, the following scroll bar displays.
Figure 7-17:
To change the crossover type:
Linear Phase 2/3-Way Crossover Selection
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
101
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
1. Tap a crossover filter box, then tap CROSSOVER SELECT.
2. Drag the scroll bar left or right, and tap the desired crossover.
3. Tap CROSSOVER SET, then YES to the warning message.
7.4.6.2 HPF Select
This button reads HPF SELECT and is active only when a high-pass filter box is selected. Follow the process described for CROSSOVER SELECT to set the high-pass filter.
7.4.6.3 LPF Select
This button reads LPF SELECT and is active only when a low-pass filter box is selected. Follow the process described for CROSSOVER SELECT to set the low-pass filter.
The LPF is enabled via the HPF/LPF FUNCTIONS menu.
7.4.7 HPF Set/LPF Set/Crossover Set/Filter Bypass/Filter Insert
This button has various states depending on the status of the selected filter. For further details, refer to
7.4.7.1 HPF Set
The button reads HPF SET when a high-pass filter has been selected from the HPF SELECT scroll bar.
7.4.7.2 LPF Set
This button reads LPF SET when a low-pass filter has been selected from the LPF SELECT scroll bar.
7.4.7.3 Crossover Set
This button reads CROSSOVER SET when a crossover filter has been selected from the
CROSSOVER SELECT scroll bar.
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
CROSSOVER SET is not applicable for the Linear
Phase Brick Wall 4-Way crossover.
7.4.7.4 Filter Bypass/Filter Insert
This button reads FILTER BYPASS when a parametric filter is selected, or when a crossover filter has been split. For parametric EQ filters, select the filter box and tap FILTER INSERT / FILTER BYPASS to activate or deactivate the selected filter.
A crossover HPF/LPF filter can be disabled by splitting the crossover and tapping FILTER BYPASS, followed by OK on the warning confirmation dialog.
Linear phase crossovers, or combined Classic crossovers, cannot be bypassed. To bypass the
Module’s overall HPF or LPF, toggle the HPF
ENABLE / LPF ENABLE button.
7.4.8 Filter Flat
The FILTER FLAT button is active only when a PEQ filter is selected. The function is inactive if a crossover is selected. Tap FILTER FLAT to set the filter gain to zero and leave frequency/bandwidth unchanged.
7.4.9 Filter Delete
The FILTER DELETE button is active only when a PEQ filter is selected. The function is inactive if a crossover is selected. Tap FILTER DELETE to remove the selected PEQ filter from the overlay.
7.4.10 Filter Edit
Tap FILTER EDIT to manually enter values for a selected filter using the on-screen (or external) keyboard.
The values available for adjustment depend on whether a crossover or PEQ filter is selected. For a crossover, HPF or LPF only the frequency can be edited; for a parametric EQ filter the gain (dB), frequency (Hz), and width (octave) can be edited.
To manually edit a filter:
1. Tap the filter box, then tap FILTER EDIT.
2. Tap the value to edit at the top of the screen (highlighted in blue).
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
103
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
3. Enter the value using the on-screen (or external) keyboard, and tap OK.
4. Tap FILTER EDIT again to exit this mode.
7.4.11 Analyzer Ready/Analyzer Unavailable
Please refer to section 7.3.12 for details on this function.
7.5 Auxiliary Output Channels
Contour Modules provide various options to configure channels as auxiliary outputs. Up to 12 individually configured auxiliary outputs can be created. The Auxiliary Output Module files allow full-bandwidth custom settings to be configured by the user. Independent Aux tabs are provided for each output channel instead of a unified crossover tab. These tabs are provided in addition to the PEQ and GEQ overlays that still apply to all outputs for the Module.
Because a different process is used to calculate output-specific EQ, the Mesa filter is not available. However, in addition to low-shelf, high-shelf, and parametric filters, the Auxiliary Output Modules provide both low-pass and high-pass filters. In Designer Mode, all-pass filters are also available.
7.5.1 Auxiliary Output Module Types and Combinations
This section describes the available Auxiliary Output Module types along with the combinations of Modules that are allowed.
7.5.1.1 One Auxiliary Output
The 1-Auxiliary Outputs Module is automatically recalled into Module B/D when a Classic 5-Way Module is recalled into Module A/C. This Module type cannot not be used in Module A/C.
7.5.1.2 Two Auxiliary Outputs
The 2-Auxiliary Outputs Module may be recalled into any Module. The other Modules of the Frame may contain any Classic or Linear Phase Module that uses two or three output channels.
7.5.1.3 Three Auxiliary Outputs
The 3-Auxiliary Outputs Module may be recalled into any Module. The other Modules of the Frame may contain any Classic or Linear Phase Module that uses two or three output channels.
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.5.1.4 Four Auxiliary Outputs
The 4-Auxiliary Outputs Module may be recalled into Module A or C. When loading this Module type, and option to load either the Classic 2-Way or 2-Auxiliary Outputs Module into Module B/D will be provided. No other combinations are allowed.
7.5.1.5 Five Auxiliary Outputs
The 5-Auxiliary Outputs Module may be recalled into Module A or C. When loading this Module type, the
1-Auxiliary Outputss Module will be recalled into Module B/D. No other combinations are allowed.
7.5.1.6 Six Auxiliary Outputs
The 6-Auxiliary Outputs Module uses two Modules (A&B, or C&D). This Module type can only be recalled into Module A or C.
7.5.1.7 Classic 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs
The Classic 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs Module may be recalled into any Module. The other Modules of the Frame may contain any Classic or Linear Phase Module that uses two or three output channels.
7.5.1.8 Classic 3-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs
The Classic 3-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs Module may be recalled into Module A or C. When loading this
Module type, and option to load either the Classic 2-Way or 2-Auxiliary Outputs Module into Module B/D will be provided. No other combinations are allowed.
7.5.1.9 Linear Phase Brick Wall 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs
The Linear Phase 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs Module may be recalled into any Module. The other Modules of the Frame may contain any Classic or Linear Phase Module that uses two or three output channels.
7.5.2 Using Auxiliary Outputs
To configure a Module for output-specific EQ, first load an Auxiliary Output file into a Module.
1. From Home, tap MODULES.
2. Place Module A of a Frame on the MAIN page, or select an existing Module.
3. Tap MODULE STORE/RECALL.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
105
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
4. Select an Auxiliary Output file from the scroll bar, and tap RECALL.
5. Read and tap YES to both warning messages.
Figure 7-18: Loading an Auxiliary Output file
6. After loading an Auxiliary Output Module file, access EQ/LEVELS for this Module by tapping
STORE/RECALL EXIT, then tap EQ/LEVELS
7.5.3 Adding Output-Specific EQ
The available overlays for the 3-Auxiliary Outputs Module are shown in Figure 7-19.
:
Figure 7-19: Auxiliary Output Tabs for 3-Aux Module
tion.
The XOVER tab is not displayed as it is not relevant for this Module type. The XOVER tab will be present for the Classic 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs (CL2w+1a) Module.
Three additional AUX tabs are present, providing individual high-pass, low-pass, and EQ filters for each output.
1. Tap AUX -1 to select the Auxiliary Output tab for output 1.
2. Add a low and a high-shelf filter.
The screen should look similar to Figure 7-20.
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
:
Figure 7-20: Adding a High Shelf and Low Shelf Filter to Aux-1
EQ added to an Aux tab affects only the associated output. Module and Group PEQ and GEQ still affect all outputs of the Module.
7.5.4 High-pass and Low-pass Filters
The high-pass and low-pass filter controls are located under the AUX OUTPUT FUNCTIONS submenu.
1. With the AUX-1 tab selected, tap AUX OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
2. Tap HPF ENABLE then tap LPF ENABLE
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
107
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
Figure 7-21: Aux Output with HPF and LPF Enabled
To adjust the slope of these filters:
1. Tap FILTER SELECT
A scroll bar appears displaying available HPF/LPF types.
2. Drag the scroll bar or use the << and >> buttons to view available filters.
3. Select the 24dB LINKWITZ/RILEY filter from the scroll bar.
4. Tap FILTER SET to activate this filter, then YES to the warning message.
Figure 7-22: Selecting a new filter slope for HPF or LPF
To protect loudspeaker drivers, the audio output for the affected channel is muted momentarily while the settings are changed.
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
5. Select the HPF by tapping its filter box located top left of the screen.
6. Select the 18dB BUTTERWORTH filter from scroll bar.
7. Tap FILTER SET, then YES to the warning message.
8. Tap AUX OUTPUT EXIT to return to the EQ/LEVELS menu.
Steep high-pass and low-pass filters (48 dB) require more EQ resources than shallower slopes (6 dB).
7.5.5 Auxiliary Output Menu Options
the EQ/Levels section of an Auxiliary Output Module.
Figure 7-23: Auxiliary Output Button Bar
A summary of the functions relevant to Auxiliary Outputs is shown below; many are identical to those used on the EQ and XOVER screens.
7.5.5.1 Home
Navigate back to the HOME menu.
7.5.5.2 EQ/Levels EXIT
Navigates to HOME menu, or I/O CONFIG if the current screen accessed via interactive block diagram.
7.5.5.3 Aux Output Functions
Provides EQ preferences, high-pass and low-pass filter options, and OVERLAY COPY/PASTE (and overlay access controls in Designer Mode).
7.5.5.4 Aux Output Flat
Deletes all EQ filters and disables HPF, and LPF filters on the selected auxiliary output channel.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
109
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.5.5.5 Filter Bypass / Filter Insert
Bypasses or inserts a selected EQ filter (not applicable to high-pass and low-pass filters).
7.5.5.6 Filter Flat
Resets the gain of the selected EQ filter to zero. Frequency and bandwidth are unchanged (not applicable for high-pass and low-pass filters).
7.5.5.7 Filter Delete
Deletes the selected EQ filter (not applicable for high-pass and low-pass filters).
7.5.5.8 Filter Edit
Allows keyboard entry of gain, frequency, and bandwidth values for EQ filters (frequency only for high-pass and low-pass filters). Tap the required value at the top of the screen (highlighted in blue) to edit using the on-screen (or external) keyboard.
7.5.5.9 Analyzer Ready / Analyzer Unavailable
Please refer to section 7.3.12 for details on this function.
After selecting AUX OUTPUT FUNCTIONS, the following menu is displayed:
Figure 7-24: Aux Output Functions Menu
7.5.5.10 Home
Navigate back to the HOME menu.
7.5.5.11 Aux Output Properties
Provides a submenu containing EQ Preferences. Access control functions such as AUX OUTPUT HIDE and
AUX OUTPUT VIEW ONLY are available only in Designer Mode. Please refer to chapter 18.
EQ/Levels Menu Reference
7.5.5.12 Aux Output Exit
Navigate back to the main EQ/Levels menu.
7.5.5.13 Filter Select
When selected (orange), a scroll bar is displayed with available high-pass and low-pass filters. Available only when a high-pass or low-pass filter is active and selected; not applicable to EQ filters
7.5.5.14 Filter Set
Available only when a high-pass or low-pass filter is selected on the FILTER SELECT scroll bar.
7.5.5.15 HPF Enable
The high-pass filter is disabled when this button is blue, and enabled when orange.
7.5.5.16 LPF Enable
The low-pass filter is disabled when this button is blue, and enabled when orange.
7.5.5.17 Aux Output Copy
Tapping this button copies the settings of the currently selected output.
7.5.5.18 Aux Output Paste
This button is active only after AUX OUTPUT COPY has been used, and will overwrite the selected auxiliary output with the settings in the copy buffer.
Auxiliary Outputs can be copied and pasted within or between Modules, but the data cannot be pasted on
XOVER, PEQ, or GEQ screens; the destination channel must be an Auxiliary Output.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
111
Modules Menu Reference
8. Modules Menu Reference
From the HOME menu, tap MODULES. The Modules menu and scroll bar appear as shown below. The scroll bar shows all Lake devices connected to the network.
Figure 8-1: Modules Menu and Scroll Bar
The scroll bar pictured above displays the following (from left to right):
▸ Virtual Frame icons that are always available for creating systems offline
▸ Two Modules of a PLM 10000Q that are available on the network but not used in the current system
▸ Four Modules of a Lake LM 44 that are in use in the current system
If many devices are available, tap and drag the scroll bar to the left/right, or tap the blue << or >> buttons.
Most options on the button bar appear gray (inactive) until a Module is placed from the scroll bar onto the
Main page.
Devices are sorted by product type, followed by alphabetical Frame name order on the Module scroll bar..
8.1 EQ/Levels
Navigate to the Modules menu, and tap the EQ/Levels button to display the parametric EQ, graphic EQ,
XOVER, and LEVELS screens for the selected Module. This function is active only when a Module has been
selected in the work area. For more information, please refer to section 7.1.
8.2 I/O Config
The I/O CONFIG screen provides access to I/O Configuration, Technical Information and Input Router
Mutes; it also provides an interactive signal path that can be used to directly navigate to the LEVELS/EQ/
XOVER screens, and the ability to reset or configure the device.
To view the I/O CONFIG screen:
1. From HOME, access the MODULES menu.
Modules Menu Reference
2. Select a Module icon in the work area, and tap I/O CONFIG
The I/O CONFIG button is active only when a Module is selected in the work area.
Figure 8-2: LM 26 I/O Configuration Screen
tion in further detail.
I/O Config settings are stored in system configuration files and in Frame/system presets. I/O Config parameters are transferred during the Frame
Replace function.
I/O Config parameters are not stored, recalled, copied, or pasted via Module or base configuration files.
8.2.1 Digital Clock Configuration
LM Series devices provide two digital clock domains:
▸
The Primary Digital Clock locks to sample rates of 48, 96, or 192 kHz.
▸
The Sample Rate Converter (SRC) Clock locks to 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96, 176.4, and 192 kHz.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
113
Modules Menu Reference
The PLM Series provide a single digital clock, equivalent to the SRC Clock on LM Series devices. The
MY8-LAKE provides a Primary clock fixed to multiples of 48 kHz and an SRC clock fixed to multiples of
44.1 kHz. The LM Series digital clock screens will be used in the examples below.
To access the Digital Clock Configuration window, tap the zoom button located at the top left of the
I/O CONFIG page.
Figure 8-3: LM 26 Digital Clock Summary - I/O Configuration
After tapping the zoom button shown in Figure 8-3 the following screen is displayed:
Figure 8-4: LM 26 Digital Clock Configuration Screen
Modules Menu Reference
8.2.1.1 Auto Detection
By default, the most appropriate digital clocks are automatically detected. The first valid clock in the order of the list shown below is chosen to configure the Primary Clock as 48/96/192 kHz, and the SRC Clock as
44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz.
1. Host Word Clock (MY8-LAKE Only)
2. AES1 (In 1+2)
3. AES2 (In 3+4)
4. AES3 (In 5+6)
5. AES4 (In 7+8)
6. Internal Clock (88.2 or 96 kHz)
If a clock signal is not relevant for the product, or is not connected, or the signal has been temporarily lost, the automatic detection process chooses the next valid clock source from the list, provided it matches the selected base rate (either 44.1 or 48 kHz). If a valid clock source is detected from a source which is higher on the list than the currently selected source, then the clock will switch to use the higher priority source.
The SRC Clock has two options for automatic clock detection: Auto 44 and Auto 48. These settings provide automatic detection within a particular range of frequencies (either 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz or 48/96/192 kHz)
8.2.1.2 Manual Config
For a fixed configuration, it is possible to fix the clock selection independently for each digital clock.
1. Tap the required clock from the CLOCK SOURCE SELECTOR at the bottom of the
DIGITAL CLOCK CONFIGURATION window.
2. Tap the icon showing the currently selected clock under the relevant clock heading in the top-left
(Primary) or top-right (SRC) sections of the window.
The larger icon in each of the windows shows the selected clock, and the associated text confirms the rates that are available when using this clock for either inputs or outputs.
Manual configuration is neccessary when two asynchronous base-48 kHz clock domains are connected to a device. In this scenario, ensure that each digital clock, digital input and digital output is manually forced to lock to the appropriate clock domain.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
115
Modules Menu Reference
8.2.1.3 Dante Clock
When Dante is enabled on a Lake device, the Primary Clock is used for Dante purposes. One Dante device will be allocated as the Dante Master, and all other devices will be Dante Slaves. The Dante master is selected automatically following these priorities:
1. Preferred Dante master (available for LM & PLM Series device via Dante Configuration screen)
2. Devices with an external BNC Word Clock input
3. Devices with other external clocks (e.g. AES Inputs)
4. Hardware-based devices
5. Software-based devices, e.g. Dante Virtual Soundcard
Where there is no distinguishing feature for a device to be selected (for example, all devices have a BNC
Word Clock connected, or multiple devices have an AES signal), then Dante uses the device with the lowest
Mac Address as a unique distinguishing feature. However, if a Frame has been the Dante master for more than one minute, its priority is elevated to prevent a master transition based on Mac address alone.
The Dante Master may lock to an external clock via the Primary Clock as shown is the example below. If the
Frame requires locking to another signal type, the SRC Clock should be used. The example below shows how two differing AES signals can be connected to one Lake device, with Dante locking to the Primary
Clock’s AES signal:
Figure 8-5: Primary Clock as Dante Master
Modules Menu Reference
Other Lake devices on the network that have Dante enabled will be Dante slaves, and the clock will report
should be locked using the SRC Clock (applicable for LM Series only).
Figure 8-6: Primary Clock as Dante Slave
8.2.1.4 Host Clock (MY8-LAKE only)
The highest priority auto-clock selection for the MY8-LAKE device is the Host Clock as shown in section
48 kHz, and the Sample Rate Convertor Clock can only lock to a source operating in multiples of 44.1 kHz.
Ensure that AES & Host clocks operating at the same base-rate (e.g. multiples of 48 kHz) are in-phase to avoid any clock slipping errors.
8.2.2 Input Configuration
Each input may be configured to use any available input source. Sources include AES/EBU digital inputs,
Dante inputs, analog inputs, and Host digital inputs (MY8-LAKE only).
To access the input configuration, tap the zoom button, or any area of the INPUT CONFIGURATION sum-
mary text on the I/O CONFIG screen shown in Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7: Input Configuration Summary on I/O Config screen
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
117
Modules Menu Reference
After tapping the zoom button or anywhere on the text, an INPUT CONFIGURATION screen similar to that
type
Figure 8-8: LM 44 Input Configuration Screen
8.2.2.1 Autoselect
The input auto-selection feature enables the set up of a redundant system. The device will attempt to use the first signal; if the first signal is unavailable it will try the second, third, or fourth signal.
By default Priority 1 is set to Dante Receivers, Priority 2 is empty, Priority 3 is AES and Prioirty 4 is Analog.
8.2.2.2 Force
This feature forces the input to the selected input, regardless of whether a valid signal is present.
8.2.2.3 Input Selector Search Filters
▸ AES displays the available AES input signals
Modules Menu Reference
▸
DANTE displays the available DANTE input signals
▸
HOST displays the available HOST input signals
▸
ANALOG displays the available ANALOG input signals
▸
SEARCH filters the available input signals based on text that is entered
8.2.2.4 Input Configuration Display Details View
After tapping the DISPLAY DETAILS button, a screen similar to Figure 8-9 is displayed.
Figure 8-9: LM 44 Input Configuration - Display Details View
8.2.2.5 AES Input Options
These options are available only for a Lake device with two clock domains.
▸
AUTO chooses the clock most relevant to the incoming digital signal. For example, if the input signal is
48 kHz, the Primary Clock will be selected; if the input is 44.1 kHz, the SRC Clock will be selected. The default is Primary Clock if a digital input signal is not present.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
119
Modules Menu Reference
▸
PRIMARY forces use of the Primary Clock, regardless of whether the clock rate matches the incoming signal rate.
▸ SRC forces use of the SRC Clock, regardless of whether the clock and incoming signal rates match.
When both the Primary and SRC clocks are manually locked to separate asynchronous base-48 kHz domains, it is important to manually select which clock domain each AES input should lock to. Leaving as AUTO may result in clock slipping errors.
8.2.2.6 Analog Input Options
For analog inputs on an LM Series or PLM Series device, ANALOG INPUT HEADROOM (RMS) provides a two-way toggle for selecting 12 or 26 dBu. Tap the required headroom level to set the maximum RMS level for the input.
8.2.2.7 Digital Gain Offset
The Digital Gain Offset represents the amount of gain increase or reduction in dB that will be applied to the digital input signal to allow seamless transition between all input types.
As levels of digital and analog signal vary, the Digital Gain Offset can be used to adjust the digital input signal level to match the analog input signal level.
This can be used in conjunction with AUTOSELECT to provide an automatic analog backup to the incoming digital audio. Separate values are provided for AES and CobraNet.
To change an offset, tap the value that you wish to change and enter a new value using the on-screen (or external) keyboard. These offsets are shown on the I/O CONFIG summary.
When aligning analog and digital signals using the
Digital Gain Offset setting, the +4 dBu Reference meter mode should be used to ensure levels are matched with a common internal reference.
8.2.2.8 Input Router Mutes
Tapping the INPUT ROUTER MUTES button from the Input Configuration screen will display the
Input Router Mutes floating tool bar.
Please refer to section 8.2.11 for further information.
Modules Menu Reference
8.2.3 GPIO Configuration (LM Series Only)
For LM Series devices, a summary of the current GPIO settings is displayed on the I/O CONFIG screen.
Please also refer to the LM Series Operation Manual for additional information on the GPIO feature.
GPIO allows external interface with alarm and monitoring systems, providing basic functionality such as muting, power control, preset recall and fault monitoring. GPI (input) allows external devices to control
Tapping the summary text or associated zoom button on the I/O CONFIG screen will display the screen
Figure 8-10: LM Series GPIO Configuration Screen
The screen is split into two sections - the top section provides options for two General Purpose Input (GPI) actions, and the bottom section provides actions two for General Purpose Output (GPO) commands.
8.2.3.1 GPI Options and Configuration (LM Series Only)
for a transition from closed > open and from open > closed.
To change the action that occurs for a GPI command:
1. Tap the ‘Acting On’ cell for the required GPI command
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
121
Modules Menu Reference
2. Select the required option from the pop-up window.
3. Tap the corresponding ‘Action when transistion to CLOSED’ cell
4. Select the required option from the pop-up window that is displayed
5. Tap the corresponding ‘Action when transistion to OPEN’
6. Select the required option from the pop-up window that is displayed
8.2.3.2 GPO Options and Configuration (LM Series Only)
defined and the state when open is set to the opposite value automatically.
Indicating
Protective Mute State
Standby State
Fault
Ready
No Indication
State when Closed
1. Muted
2. Unmuted
1. Standby
2. On
1. No Fault
2. Any Fault
1. Ready
2. Not Ready
-
Table 8-1: GPO Options
To change the action that occurs for a GPO command:
1. Tap the ‘Indicating’ cell for GPO1 or GPO2
2. Select the required option from the pop-up window.
3. Tap the corresponding ‘State when CLOSED’ cell
4. Select the required option from the pop-up window that is displayed
‘State when OPEN‘ will be set automatically.
8.2.4 Breaker Emulation Limiter (BEL
™
) - PLM 20000Q Only
behaves accordingly when the nominal current is reached.
Modules Menu Reference
The Conservative breaker type does not allow the current to exceed the nominal current value.
The Fast and Universal breaker types allow the current to exceed the nominal current value, but calculate how the temperature of the breaker is affected. The allowed current is decreased when necessary to reduce breaker temperature; the Universal breaker type allows a higher temperature before the allowed current is reduced.
The meters on the right of the screen display Volts RMS and Amps RMS. The Volts RMS meter is gray
(voltage OK) when the voltage is between 80 and 265 V. The meter turns orange (voltage warning) when between 65 V and 80 V, and turns red (voltage fault) when below 65 V or above 265 V.
Figure 8-11: Breaker Emulation Limiter Screen
To change the nominal current, tap the blue edit value and enter a value between 5.0 A and 32.0 A.
To change the currently selected breaker type, tap the required breaker on the scrolling bar at the bottom of the screen then tap again in the Breaker Type box at the top of the screen.
8.2.5 Dante Configuration
The Dante Configuration summary on the I/O CONFIG screen reports either the Global Dante Clock Sample
Rate, or advises that Dante is disabled; it additionally lists the assigned receiver subscriptions and associated sample rate and status.
Further information on Dante settings can be accessed by tapping the zoom button or the associated text. A
screen similar to that shown in Figure 8-12 will be displayed.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
123
Modules Menu Reference
To configure the device for Dante dual redundant operation (LM and PLM Series only), navigate to the
TECHNICAL DATA screen via the I/O CONFIG menu and enable the Dual Redundancy option. This change
will require a power cycle of the device; please refer to section 8.2.10.4.
8.2.5.1 Device Tab
Tapping the zoom button labeled DANTE CONFIGURATION displays the Dante Configuration > Device tab, with Dante disabled by default:
Figure 8-12: Dante is Disabled by Default
To enable Dante, tap the button labelled Dante Disabled; the button turns orange and now reads Dante
Enabled and other functions become available.
Dante can be enabled globally for all Dante-capable devices in the current system configuration via Home > All > Global Info >
Events & Control > Control > Global Dante Enabled control.
Preferred Clock Master
This option identifies this device as the preferred clock master device for the Dante network. To enable this device as the Preferred Clock Master, tap this button.
This parameter is stored in System Files, and syncronizes between the Lake Controller and the Dante
Controller.
If this button is disabled when Dante is Enabled, the device is set to Dante Slave Only mode. The Dante
Slave Only mode can be viewed/edited via the Technical Data screen - refer to section 8.2.10.
Modules Menu Reference
Sample Rate
Dante may operate at either 48 kHz or 96 kHz; tap the appropriate button to select the preferred sample rate.
Dante Device Name
The Copy Frame Label button copies the Frame label into the Dante Device Name parameter for this device; after tapping this button, click OK on the on-screen keyboard to confirm the change. Alternatively the keyboard icon may be selected to display the keyboard for manual Dante Device Name entry.
If the Dante Device Name is changed after another device has already subscribed using the previous name, the existing audio connection with be lost and the other device will need to subscribe again.
When recalling a system file created before Lake
Controller v6.1, the legacy DLP-XX-XX device names are restored to retain Dante subscriptions.
This parameter is syncronized between the Lake Controller and the Dante Controller.
Device Latency Options
This latency is additional Dante-specific latency used to ensure uninterrupted digital audio. The latency is added to the normal latency of your chosen signal path and Module type.
The following latencies are available dependent on the device:
▸
LM Series (Gigabit Ethernet): 0.25ms / 0.50ms / 1.00ms / 2.00ms / 5.00ms
▸
PLM Series (100 Mbit Ethernet): 1.00ms / 2.00ms / 5.00ms
This parameter is syncronized between the Lake Controller and the Dante Controller.
Dante latency values changed in Lake Controller v6.1.
When recalling a system file created before Lake
Controller v6.1, previous Dante latency options will be converted, rounding up to the nearest latency value.
These minimum receive latency options are provided to allow flexibility depending on the network complexity and architecture. Higher latency reduces the risk of audio glitches due to audio packets being delayed via the network, and is therefore recommended for complex networks containing many hops, or in circumstances where a small delay is irrelevant and reliability is paramount.
Using Etherent switches without Quality of Service
(QoS) is not recommended. If QoS is unavailable, use the 5 ms latency option on all devices to reduce the risk of audio glitches.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
125
Modules Menu Reference
8.2.5.2 Receive Tab
To configure the Dante Receivers for the selected device, tap the RECEIVE tab then assign up to four channels (LM Series) or two channels (PLM Series) from another Dante device which will be used as inputs to this device.
To assign Dante Receive channels to a device:
1. Tap the RECEIVE tab
2. Select a device from the DEVICES scrollbar
3. Tap a channel on the Channels scrollbar then place the selected channel in a Receiver location at the top of the screen.
This parameter is syncronized between the Lake Controller and the Dante Controller.
Channels that cannot be subscribed to due to sample rate differences or other reasons are displayed greyed out after those which can be subscribed.
When Dante is locked for the receiving channel, an asterisk * is shown next to the Receiver number
Figure 8-13: LM Series Dante Receive
Modules Menu Reference
When Dante is enabled, the INPUT CONFIGURATION screen provides an option to view the assigned
Dante Receivers as configured on the DANTE CONFIGURATION > RECEIVE tab. To assign a Dante Receive channel to an available Input Priority, tap on an icon on the scrollbar and place in an Input Priority tab.
PRODUCT
Lake LM Series
PLM Series
MY8-LAKE
Figure 8-14: Dante Receivers on Input Configuration scroll bar
DANTE IN
4 channels
2 channels
N/A
DANTE OUT
8 channels
2 channels
(unprocessed audio only)
N/A
Table 8-2: Dante Input / Output Channels by Product
DUAL REDUNDANCY
YES
YES
N/A
8.2.5.3 Transmit Tab
When Dante is enabled, by default the device will receive audio but will not transmit audio.
Transmission is disabled in order to prevent unnecessary network traffic and unused channels on the INPUT CONFIGURATION screen of all other devices on the network.
To transmit Dante channels from a device:
1. Tap the DANTE DISABLED button on the DEVICE tab
2. Tap the TRANSMIT tab
3. Tap the TRANSMIT OUTPUTS button
Transmit channels from this device will now appear on the list of all available Dante channels on the network.
Dante Transmit can be enabled globally for all Dante-enabled devices in the current system configuration via Home > All >
Global Info > Events & Control > Control > Global Dante Transmit
Enabled control.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
127
Modules Menu Reference
Figure 8-15: LM Series Dante Transmit Enabled
When the TRANSMIT OUTPUTS button is active (orange), all Dante channels will be advertised on the
Dante audio network as available channels for any other Dante receiver to use for its input/s. In addition, this screen provides MULTI/UNI options for each channel, and output channel labeling functions as shown in
Figure 8-16: Options and Labels for Dante Outputs
Multicast / Unicast Setting
The MULTI/UNI options provide the ability to identify whether each channel will be configured as multicast
(i.e. many devices receive a connection to the same audio flow), or configured as unicast (i.e. each device receives a separate point-to-point audio flow).
Use alphanumeric characters (uppercase or lowercase) and the “-” character only. DO NOT use any other characters, especially @ . =
It is important to use Multicast when a particular channel is distributed to three or more receivers; this ensures optimal bandwidth usage and Dante network stability.
Set to multicast before enabling the transmit outputs option if it is known that three or more receivers will subscribe to this channel.
Modules Menu Reference
This parameter is syncronized between the Lake Controller and the Dante Controller.
Output Channel Labeling
Tapping the keyboard button to the right of the UNI button will display the on-screen keyboard allowing up to a 31-character name to be entered for this Dante channel.
Use alphanumeric characters (uppercase or lowercase) and the “-” character only. DO NOT use any other characters, especially @ . =
Entry of appropriate and meaningful channel labels on all devices is recommended before configuring system routing. If a Dante device name or output channel label is changed on a Dante transmitter after routing to receiving devices, the channel must be disconnected and re-routed on the receiver/s to reestablish a valid connection.
For additional information regarding Dante configuration, please refer to chapter 8.2.
As Dante uses standard Ethernet for digital audio transmission, there are certain guidelines and rules which
the Dante literature included with the Lake Controller software installation.
To configure the device for Dante dual redundant operation (LM and PLM Series only), navigate to the
TECHNICAL DATA screen via the I/O CONFIG menu and enable the Dual Redundancy option.
This change will require a power cycle of the device; please refer to section 8.2.10.4.
Dual redundancy status is also displayed on the Front
Panel of the device.
8.2.6 Iso-Float Status & AES Termination
When an online LM or PLM Series device is selected the button reads Analog Iso-Float & AES Termination.
When a virtual LM or PLM Series, or an online or virtual MY8-LAKE device is selected then neither option is available.
The Analog Iso-Float & AES Termination Status screen is accessed by tapping the zoom button to the left of
this summary as shown in Figure 8-17.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
129
Modules Menu Reference
Figure 8-17: Analog Iso-Float & AES Termination Summary
Software control of the Analog Iso-Float is available for LM & PLM Series, along with separate control for the analog outputs on LM Series devices. AES Termination is available for LM & PLM Series. The current
status is identified by an orange button as shown in Figure 8-18.
Figure 8-18: LM Series Analog Iso-Float & AES Termination Status
8.2.7 Input Mix Summary and Input Mixers/Switches
Input mix summaries and switches are shown on the I/O CONFIG page as part of the interactive signal path for each Module.
8.2.7.1 Input Mix Summary
The block diagram for each Module shows a summary of the connected inputs and associated gain settings.
The example in Figure 8-19 shows a LM Series Mesa Module.
Figure 8-19: LM Series Mesa Module Input Mix Summary and Interactive Block Diagram
Modules Menu Reference
8.2.7.2 Input Mixer
The Input Mixer provides the ability to mix two incoming audio channels for PLMs; four channels for
LM Series and MY8-LAKE Contour Modules; and eight channels for LM Series Mesa EQ Modules.
The Input Mixer can be accessed from two locations:
▸ Tap the Input Mix Summary from I/O CONFIG
▸ Tap the INPUT MIXER zoom button from LEVELS
The input mixer provides gain faders and ON/OFF connection buttons as shown in Figure 8-20.
Figure 8-20: LM Series and MY8-Lake Contour Module Input Mixer
To connect/disconnect an input, tap the button labeled ON/OFF or drag the fader. The total Module input mix is shown on the far right of the Input Mixer window.
For Dante inputs, the receiver input channel label is displayed below the ON button.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
131
Modules Menu Reference
Input +4dBu Button
Tap the INPUT +4dBu button to view the physical input signal meter relative to +4 dBu. Tap the button again to return to the default Digital Clip (DClip) view.
The DClip metering mode shows the audio level prior to any gain adjustment (input headroom, or digital gain offset), and indicates when the A/D converters will clip. The +4 dBu metering mode shows the audio level after any gain adjustment, and is useful for comparing levels of different input signals prior to processing.
This is a global function; all physical input meters throughout the system display the reference selected here.
Auxiliary Input Toggle Switch
An auxiliary channel is available on the following Module types:
▸
Classic 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs (CL2w+1a)
▸
Classic 3-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs (CL3w+1a)
▸
Linear Phase Classic 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs (LP2w+1a)
The interactive block diagram for these Modules types looks similar to that shown in Figure 8-21.
Figure 8-21: 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs Block Diagram and Input Mixers
These Module types provide a separate input selector for the auxiliary channel. This allows the auxiliary channel to be sourced independently of the crossover, or from the same post-input EQ signal.
The parametric [PEQ] and graphic [GEQ] overlays for the crossover section also affect the auxiliary output channel when the input switch is set as shown in
Modules Menu Reference
Simplified View Input Toggle (MY8-LAKE Mesa Mode Only)
For an MY8-LAKE in Mesa Mode, the default I/O configuration view is set to Simplified View. In this view, either the Host output or AES input can be selected as the source input signal. The Input Mixer and Input
Router are not available; the input selector toggles between Host Output and AES Input.
Figure 8-22: MY8-LAKE Simplified View Input Mixer
Please refer to section 21.4 for further information on Simplified View.
8.2.8 Output Configuration
The Output Configuration window is displayed after tapping the zoom button located to the right of each output on the right side of the I/O CONFIG page. A summary of the output connections for each Module appears at the bottom of each Module cell on the I/O CONFIG page.
Figure 8-23: Output Configuration Zoom Button
After tapping any of these zoom buttons, an Output Configuration window is displayed, which looks similar
type of Lake device currently selected.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
133
Modules Menu Reference
Figure 8-24: Output Configuration Screen
The left side of the screen lists the output channels for each Module. The orange numbered blocks denote the output/s from which the signal will be sent. The same audio channel can be sent from multiple outputs, but each digital output can contain only one channel of audio.
The following sections describe the options for SOURCE and DESTINATION. Selecting the required
SOURCE and DESTINATION values enables patching of any input or Module output to any available audio output on the device.
8.2.8.1 Source
The arrow buttons enable selection of the audio source. The default setting is Module Outputs, which are the Lake device DSP channels. Depending on the device type and installed options, the source can also be set to AES Inputs, Analog Inputs, Input Router Outputs, Dante Receivers or Host Inputs.
All Source options except Module Outputs bypass the DSP, providing pass-thru routing / signal conversion.
8.2.8.2 Destination
The arrow buttons enable selection of the audio destination. The default setting is AES (or Host for
MY8-LAKE). The destination can also be set to Analog or Dante where available.
8.2.8.3 Destination Output Options
Tapping the zoom button under DESTINATION will provide a pop-up screen with further options for the selected output type.
Modules Menu Reference
Analog Output Options
For analog outputs, the ANALOG ISO-FLOAT & AES TERMINATION STATUS is displayed. Please refer to
section 8.2.6 for further details.
AES Output Options
For devices with AES outputs, the relevant AES Output Sample Rate Configuration screen is displayed as
as the default. Auto sets the AES Outputs to follow the settings in the host device, selecting manual allows independant configuration for each AES output.
When both the Primary and SRC clocks are manually locked to separate asynchronous base-48 kHz domains, it is important to manually select which clock domain each AES input should lock to. Leaving as AUTO may result in clock slipping errors.
Figure 8-25: AES Output Sample Rate Configuration (LM Series / MY8-LAKE)
Please refer to section 8.2.1 for further information on Digital Clock Configuration.
For all output types, the number of channels varies depending on the options available for the selected device.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
135
Modules Menu Reference
Dante Output Configuration
For Dante outputs the DANTE CONFIGURATION screen is displayed. Please refer to section 4.3.6 for
further details regarding Dante.
Disconnecting Outputs for Output Type
Tapping the DISCONNECT ALL icon will disconnect all outputs for the currently selected destination output type. For example, if ANALOG is the currently selected output type, tapping this button will disconnect all analog outputs from any source they are currently connected to. A warning dialog is displayed for confirmation on this action.
Bridge Mode Configuration (PLM Series devices only)
To activate power output channel bridge mode on a PLM Series device, tap the blue Bridge button on the
tors merge to indicate bridge mode is active. To deactivate output channel bridge mode, tap the orange
Bridge button again.
Figure 8-26: Bridge Mode (PLM Series only)
When Bridge Mode is activated, CLASS 3 WIRING is required. Please refer to the PLM Series Operation Manual for additional wiring information.
Modules Menu Reference
8.2.9 Latency Match
This button is available on LM and PLM Series devices. It is blue when disabled and orange when enabled.
This feature adds additional latency to the output signal to enable integration with legacy Contour Pro 26 or
Mesa Quad EQ products. LATENCY MATCH is based on the following criteria:
▸ Input types for all devices are identical (Analog or AES only).
▸ Input sample rates for all devices are identical where AES inputs are being used.
▸ Outputs are set to analog.
For any other scenarios, the appropriate delay adjustments must be made manually.
8.2.10 Technical Data
The technical data screen is displayed by tapping TECHNICAL DATA (F5) on the I/O CONFIG button bar for the LM Series, PLM Series and MY8-LAKE devices.
Technical Data includes hardware-based Frame data including IP Address, Dual Redundancy and Dante
Slave Only settings that are unaffected by SYSTEM RECALL, FRAME REPLACE, FRAME PRESET RECALL or FRAME CONFIGURATION and SOFT RESET options. When any of these hardware-based parameters are changed, a power cycle is required to the change the device.
product differences are detailed in the following sections.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
137
Modules Menu Reference
Figure 8-27: LM 44 Technical Data Screen
8.2.10.1 Product/Model
The description and model number for the selected device.
8.2.10.2 MAC Address
The MAC address is the unique Ethernet address of the selected device.
8.2.10.3 Dante Slave Only
If Dante Slave Only is Enabled, the device can only operate as a slave to the Dante network, and will not be part of the Dante Clock Master selection process. It is recommended that this setting is enabled for all devices unless the device is specifically required to be part of the Dante Clock Master selection process.
This setting is enabled (ON) by default for PLM Series devices and disabled (OFF) by default for LM Series devices.
This is a hardware-based parameter that is unaffected by SYSTEM RECALL, FRAME REPLACE, FRAME
PRESET RECALL or FRAME CONFIGURATION and SOFT RESET options. It can be changed only via this screen and via the Factory Reset option on the Front Panel of the device.
Modules Menu Reference
8.2.10.4 Dual Redundancy (LM and PLM Only)
This option activates dual redundant network capabilities for Lake Controller data and Dante audio. The secondary Ethernet port has an IP address in the 172.31.x.x range. The power must be cycled on the Lake device to complete the change.
The Dual Redundancy option can also be viewed and changed for all LM & PLM Series devices via the
Global Control Tab.
This hardware parameter is unaffected by SYSTEM RECALL,
FRAME REPLACE, FRAME PRESET RECALL or FRAME
CONFIGURATION and SOFT RESET options.
This value can only be changed via the Technical Data screen, Global Control Tab, or via a the Factory Reset option from the device front panel.
8.2.10.5 IP Address Config
This field is set by default to AUTO - ZERO CONF. It can also be set to AUTO - DHCP (if a DHCP server is used) or to a FIXED IP ADDRESS. The power must be cycled on the Lake device to complete the change.
This hardware parameter is unaffected by SYSTEM RECALL,
FRAME REPLACE, FRAME PRESET RECALL or FRAME
CONFIGURATION and SOFT RESET options.
This parameter is changed only via this screen and via the FACTORY RESET option from the front panel of the device.
8.2.10.6 IP Address
The Internet protocol (IP) address identifies which device is sending or receiving information. The power must be cycled on the Lake device to complete the change.
Address may be entered manually.
This hardware parameter is unaffected by SYSTEM RECALL,
FRAME REPLACE, FRAME PRESET RECALL or FRAME
CONFIGURATION and SOFT RESET options.
This parameter is changed only via this screen and via the FACTORY RESET option from the front panel of the device.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
139
Modules Menu Reference
8.2.10.7 Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used for IP address routing; the default setting is 255.255.0.0 when
AUTO - ZERO CONF is selected. The power must be cycled on the Lake device to complete the change.
Subnet Mask may be entered manually.
This parameter is unaffected by SYSTEM RECALL, FRAME PRESET RECALL or soft FRAME RESET options. It is reset only via the FACTORY RESET option from the front panel of the device.
8.2.10.8 ID
The unique Lake device identifier.
8.2.10.9 Firmware
The firmware version that is currently running on the selected device.
8.2.10.10 Serial Number:
Displays the hardware serial number for the selected device.
8.2.11 Input Router Mutes
Input Router Mutes represent the actual inputs to the device. Muting an input via Input Router Mutes will mute the signal to all Modules that are connected to that Input Router. To display the Input Router Mutes tool-bar:
▸ Tap INPUT ROUTER MUTES (F6) from the button bar on the I/O CONFIG screen
▸ Tap the INPUT ROUTER MUTES zoom button from the Levels screen
The buttons describe the current status. An input with a red button labelled MUTED is currently muted and may be tapped to unmute the input. A button labelled UNMUTED is currently unmuted and may be tapped to mute the input.
Modules Menu Reference
Figure 8-28: Input Router Mutes
Input Router Mutes are not available when a device is offline.
8.2.12 Interactive Signal Path Block Diagram
The signal path of each Module is shown in graphical form on the right of the I/O CONFIG page. Each of the blocks can be selected to navigate directly to the associated EQ/LEVELS/XOVER/AUX/HPF/LPF screens.
After using the interactive block diagrams to access the other screens, the EQ/LEVELS EXIT button returns you to the I/O CONFIG page instead of
HOME.
8.2.13 Input Selection (MY8-LAKE in Simplified View Only)
The MY8-LAKE device has a unique simplified view for the Mesa Frame configuration by default. In this
8.2.14 Frame Config/Soft Reset
For PLM Series devices this button reads SOFT RESET and resets the device to its factory default state, without removing any presets stored in the device, and without resetting the networking configuration data including IP Config, IP Address, Subnet Mask & Dual Redundancy settings.
For LM Series and MY8-LAKE devices, this button reads FRAME CONFIG and provides a sub-menu allowing the device to be configured as:
▸ CONTOUR (2-Contour Modules for LM Series; 4-Contour Modules for MY8-LAKE)
▸ MESA EQ (4-Mesa EQ Modules for LM Series; 8-Mesa EQ Modules for MY8-LAKE)
▸ CONTOUR/MESA EQ (2-Contour Modules and 4-Mesa EQ Modules - MY8-LAKE)
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
141
Modules Menu Reference
For all products, configuring or resetting a device via the Lake Controller retains the current IP address setting and system/Frame presets.
8.3 Label & Lock
From the Modules menu, tap LABEL & LOCK to view a submenu with functions to label a Module or Frame and allow a system designer to lock Module and base configurations
8.3.1 Module Label
The Module Label is a user-definable value at the bottom of the Module icon that identifies the Module.
To label a Module:
1. Tap the desired Module icon on the MAIN page.
2. Tap MODULE LABEL, enter a Module name, and tap OK.
8.3.2 Frame Label
The Frame label is a ten-character user-defined value that appears on the Module icon and on the front panel of the device. The Frame label associates the Module icons with a Lake device.
To label a Frame:
1. Tap any Module of the Frame you wish to label.
2. Tap FRAME LABEL, enter a Frame name, and tap OK.
When a Frame consists of multiple Modules, labelling the Frame via one Module automatically updates the Frame label on any associated Module icons.
8.3.3 Module and Base Configuration Locking
The following functions are active only in Designer Mode:
▸ MODULE UNLOCKED/UNLOCK MODULE
Modules Menu Reference
▸
SET MOD PASSWORD
▸
BASE UNLOCKED/UNLOCK BASE
▸
SET BASE PASSWORD
For additional details on these functions, please refer to chapter 18.
8.4 Copy/Paste/Replace
From the MODULES menu, tap the COPY/PASTE/REPLACE button to view a submenu that allows the transferring of data between Modules. These functions enable fast setup of multiple speakers using the same type and configuration.
The REPLACE function allows assignment of a different physical hardware device to perform the task of a selected device (i.e. to transfer all data from one hardware device to another). The BATCH REPLACE function allows fast transfer of data from a virtual or offline configuration to online Frames.
8.4.1 Copy
This function is active only when a Module icon is selected. To copy data from a Module:
1. Tap the Module icon that contains the data to copy.
2. Tap COPY.
8.4.2 Paste
This function is active only when Module data has been previously copied and a destination Module icon is selected. To paste data to a Module:
1. Tap the Module icon in which to paste the data.
2. Tap PASTE.
A Mesa EQ Module cannot be pasted into a
Contour Module and vice versa.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
143
Modules Menu Reference
8.4.3 Replace Frame
The REPLACE function allows transfer of Module/Super Module/Group data between devices. If a previously used device is unavailable, or the device that performs a task is required to change, follow these steps:n
1. Tap COPY/PASTE/REPLACE from the Modules menu.
2. Tap a Module from the Frame you wish to replace on the work area.
3. Tap REPLACE FRAME
The Module scroll bar displays used and unused Modules.
4. Tap a Module from an unused Frame then tap COMPLETE REPLACE.
To locate a particular device, tap the SEL button on the front panel to center the unit on the scroll bar.
To locate an LM Series device, tap the top left dynamic function button on the front panel. To locate a PLM Series device, tap dynamic function button two from the top left of the LCD display.
To locate an MY8-LAKE device, select an online
MY8-LAKE Module icon in the Controller; the associated unit displays a static white LED on the rear panel. Selection via hardware is unavailable.
▸ A Frame can only be replaced with a currently unused Frame of the same product type.
▸ All Modules of a Frame must be present on the Module scroll bar for the Replace Frame function to work.
▸
For LM Series and MY8-LAKE devices, the source and destination Frames must be of the same configuration type (i.e. Contour, Mesa, or Contour/Mesa)
Network IP settings and Dual Redundancy configuration are not transferred during a Frame
Replace opertation; configure this manually on the destination Frame.
8.4.4 Complete Replace
This button completes the REPLACE FRAME function. This function is active only when the REPLACE button is selected and a destination Module has been selected from the Module scroll bar.
Data from the source Frame is transferred to the destination Frame and the Frame from the scroll bar will now take the place of the source Frame in the system configuration.
If the source Frame is online, all Modules in the work area are returned to the scroll bar.
Modules Menu Reference
8.4.5 Batch Replace
This button is active (blue) regardless of whether a Module is selected in the work area. When tapped a
screen similar to Figure 8-29 is displayed.
The left side of the screen displays offline or Virtual Frames present in the main work area. The right side of the screen displays online Frames.
To complete the BATCH REPLACE, all online destination Frames must be on the Module scroll bar, and not currently in use in the work area.
Frames are sorted by Frame type (product/configuration), then by Frame name. If the product type and
Frame name match between an online and offline Frame, a number will automatically be assigned to the destination Frame.
Pressing the ME/SEL button on the front panel will identify the selected destination Frame with yellow highlighting.
Figure 8-29: Batch Replace Screen
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
145
Modules Menu Reference
8.4.5.1 Assigning the Virtual Frames to the Destination Frames
With the exception of very small systems, the virtual/offline Frame must be labeled to enable Frame identification. If the destination Frame of the same product type and configuration is also labeled with a matching name, the assignment will be automatic. Tapping START REPLACE will transfer data to the associated online Frames.
If the destination Frames are not labeled:
1. Type the corresponding offline/Virtual Frame number into the # field, either via the on-screen or a manual keyboard.
2. The destination Frame will move up or down the list so that it is on the same row as its corresponding offline/Virtual Frame.
3. Tap START REPLACE, then tap YES to the confirmation message.
All offline/Virtual Frame data will be transferred to the online Frames.
8.5 Remove
To remove a Module from the current system, tap the Module icon in the work area while in the MODULES menu then tap REMOVE.
Audio will not be affected unless the Module is assigned to a Group that contains settings that affect the audio of the Module.
You can also remove a Module by dragging the
Module icon to the Module scroll bar when in the
MODULES menu
No warning is displayed unless the selected
Module is assigned to a Group. In this instance, removing a Module de-assigns it from all Groups to which it is currently assigned.
8.6 Module Store/Recall
Tap the MODULE STORE/RECALL button to view a submenu containing functions that recall and store
Module and base configurations, and to store Frame presets. The button bar displays the following options and a scroll bar with files and folders.
Figure 8-30: Module Store/Recall Menu and Scroll Bar
Modules Menu Reference
For detailed information on all of the Module file types supported by the Lake Controller, please refer to
8.6.1 Recall/Open
This button’s function and label depends on whether a folder or file is selected. It is inactive when neither a file nor folder is selected, or when a Group icon is selected in the work area.
The button is labeled OPEN when a folder is selected. To open a folder, tap the desired folder icon on the scroll bar, then tap OPEN.
Double-tapping a folder or file icon also opens the folder or file.
The button is labeled RECALL when a file is selected. To recall a Module file, tap the desired file, then tap
RECALL. Confirm the action by tapping YES to the warning message.
Figure 8-31: Recalling a Module File
Recalling a Module file overwrites all data currently stored in the selected Module and removes the
Module from any Groups.
EAW
®
Greybox file (.gyx) may also be recalled directly into the Modules of PLM Series devices.
Please refer to chapter 9 for further details.
8.6.2 Store
The STORE button stores over an existing file. This button is active only when a file is selected.
1. Tap an existing file to store over (overwrite).
2. Tap STORE.
3. Confirm the action by tapping the YES button in the warning message.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
147
Modules Menu Reference
If the selected file is set to READ ONLY, the STORE function is gray (inactive).
8.6.3 New Store
The NEW STORE button stores the current Module configuration under a new file name.
1. Navigate the file system, and tap the desired destination folder to select it.
2. Tap NEW STORE.
3. Enter the file name.
4. Tap OK.
The scroll bar displays the new file
8.6.4 Base Configuration
A base configuration file defines a starting point for the Module setup. It contains EQ and levels settings, invisible to the user, which represent the appropriate general configuration for a particular speaker type.
EQ, LEVELS and XOVER settings for an existing Module may be stored as a base configuration for future use when configuring new Modules. A system designer can also lock access to the XOVER/AUX screens
(Contour) or HPF/LPF screen (Mesa EQ) within the base configuration file. For details on this function,
The RECALL/OPEN, STORE, and NEW STORE functions operate identically as described above, but the available files/folders in the scroll bar change when BASE CONFIGURATION is selected.
To store or recall a base configuration file, perform the following steps:
1. Select a Module icon in the work area.
2. Tap MODULE STORE/RECALL from the MODULES menu.
3. Tap BASE CONFIGURATION.
4. Navigate to the desired folder/file.
5. Use the RECALL/STORE/NEW STORE functions as required.
Modules Menu Reference
A base configuration file cannot be created from a
Virtual Frame.
8.6.5 File Utilities
This button provides a submenu containing further functions that manage files and folders from within the
Lake Controller.
8.6.5.1 Open
This button is active only when a folder is selected. Tap OPEN to open the selected folder.
8.6.5.2 Read Only
This function protects important files from being accidentally overwritten or deleted and is active only when a file is selected. The currently selected file’s status is identified by the color of the READ ONLY button:
▸ ORANGE - indicates the selected file is set to READ ONLY.
▸ BLUE - indicates the selected file is not protected.
To change the Read Only status of a file:
1. Tap a file from the scroll bar to select it.
2. Tap READ ONLY to toggle function ON (orange) and OFF (blue).
8.6.5.3 Rename
This button allows the name of a file/folder to be changed.
1. Tap the required file/folder from the scroll bar, then tap RENAME.
2. Enter the new name, and tap OK.
8.6.5.4 Delete
This button is active only when a file or folder is selected. When a file is selected, this function will only be available if the file is not set to READ ONLY. To delete a file or folder:
1. Tap a file or folder to select it, then tap DELETE.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
149
Modules Menu Reference
2. Confirm action by tapping YES in the warning message.
Deletion of a file is permanent and cannot be restored using the UNDO function.
8.6.5.5 New Folder
This button creates a new folder in the current directory.
1. Navigate to the desired directory location and tap NEW FOLDER.
2. Enter the folder name, and tap OK.
8.6.6 Frame Presets (LM and PLM Series Only)
A Frame preset is effectively a configuration for the device that is stored in local memory inside the device for fast retrieval with or without the Lake Controller.
There are 100 preset locations are available for LM and PLM Series devices; the MY8-LAKE card does not support presets as the host controls all snapshot/preset functionality.
Frame presets can be recalled instantly using the front panel, without the use of the Lake Controller soft-
ware. For further information on presets and the Preset Manager Utility, please refer to chapter 26.
The FRAME PRESETS button provides a submenu containing the functions described below.
8.6.6.1 Store
This button is active only when a Module of an online Frame is selected and a preset location is selected that is not empty (such as when overwriting an existing preset).
To overwrite the settings of the Frame preset:
1. Recall or configure both Modules of the Frame with the required settings.
2. Tap a Module icon of the Frame containing the data you wish to store.
3. Tap FRAME PRESETS from the MODULE STORE/RECALL menu.
4. Select a previously used preset location, and tap STORE.
Modules Menu Reference
8.6.6.2 Store with New Name
This button is active only when a Module of an online Frame is selected and a preset location is selected.
The function is similar to STORE, but always provides the on-screen keyboard for entering a preset name.
8.6.6.3 Clear
This button is active only when a Module of an online Frame is selected and a preset location containing data is selected. To delete the data in a preset location, perform the following steps:
1. Tap a Module icon of the Frame containing the preset for deletion.
2. Select the preset location from the scroll bar.
3. Tap CLEAR, then YES to the warning message.
8.7 Add Page
The ADD PAGE function is always available from the MODULES menu and creates additional pages that help manage large systems that contain many Module and Group icons.
8.8 Super Modules (LM and PLM Series Contour Modules only)
Super Modules enable the user to control Contour Modules that span multiple Frames (LM and PLM Series devices only) as a single entity in the user interface. A Super Module can be a combination of two or more processing Modules on the same or different Frames that act together to provide the same audio processing with flexible output routing.
8.8.1 Assigning Super Modules
1. Tap MODULES.
2. Tap a Module on the scroll bar, and place it in the work area.
3. Tap SUPER MODULES from the MODULES menu.
A Venn icon that represents the combination of multiple Modules appears in the scrolling bar as shown
4. Tap this Super Module icon and place it in the work area.
The icon displays as a Super Module marked as empty.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
151
Modules Menu Reference
5. Tap the empty Super Module to select it, then tap ASSIGN MODULE.
A message displays, advising Group assignments of the first Module assigned to a Super Module will be transferred to subsequently assigned Modules.
6. Tap the icons for Modules to be included in the Super Module.
The Modules are assigned to the Super Module and removed from the work area. The Modules contained in the Super Module appear in the scrolling bar when the Super Module is selected.
Figure 8-32: Super Modules
8.8.2 Super Module EQ/Levels or Module EQ/Levels
These functions enable you to view or change the EQ levels of a Module or Super Module. When a Module is selected, you change only the EQ and level of that Module. When a Super Module is selected, you
on EQ/Levels.
To view the EQ/Levels of a Module or Super Module, tap the Module or Super Module to select it, then tap
SUPER MOD EQ/LEVELS or MODULE EQ/LEVELS.
Modules Menu Reference
8.8.3 SM Routing: I/O Config
This button reads I/O CONFIG when a Module is selected and SM ROUTING when a Super Module is
selected. For further information on the I/O CONFIG option, please refer to section 8.2.
The SM ROUTING function displays the Super Module output routing pop-up window. It shows each of the elemental Modules contained in the Super Module and its available output routing options.
To configure routing for a Super Module:
1. From HOME, tap MODULES.
2. Select a Super Module in the work area.
3. Tap SM ROUTING.
Figure 8-33 shows the SM ROUTING screen for a stereo Classic 4-Way configuration split across two
Lab.gruppen PLM 10000Q amplifiers. The sub and low channels are being driven by one amplifier in
Bridged Mode, and the mid and high channels by a separate amplifier in normal mode.
Figure 8-33: SM Routing Screen
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
153
Modules Menu Reference
With this Super Module configuration, two 4-Way speakers can be controlled simultaneously via one Super
Module icon, with all changes to levels, EQ and crossover being duplicated in real time across both amplifiers.
The DESTINATION arrow icons enable selection of available output types. The magnifying glass icon
navigates to the I/O CONFIG screen of the associated Frame. Please refer to section 8.2 for further
details.
The SM Routing screen is divided into two sections. The left side contains the interactive block diagram that provides access to Super Module settings; the right side displays output configuration information for each
Module.
8.8.4 Label Frame
To label a Frame, perform the following steps:
1. Select a Module in the work area, or from the Super Module scroll bar if all Modules of the Frame are already assigned to a Super Module.
2. Tap LABEL FRAME
8.8.5 De-assigning a Super Module
To de-assign a Super Module:
1. Select a Super Module in the work area and tap DE-ASSIGN MODULE [F7]
2. Tap the Module icons on the scroll bar to remove them from the Super Module
8.8.6 Remove Super Module
To remove a Super Module:
1. Tap the Super Module icon in the work area and tap REMOVE SUPER MOD.
A message appears, advising that removing the Super Module disassociates it with all the Modules currently assigned to it.
2. Tap YES to proceed. The Super Module disappears.
A Super Module can also be removed by dragging it to the Super Module scroll bar.
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
9. Module File Types & LoadLibrary
™
Lake devices provide two categories of Modules; Contour Modules and Mesa Modules. Contour Modules are suitable for devices that can perform loudspeaker crossover functionality, and Mesa Modules are suitable for devices that provide equalization only.
This chapter provides a detailed reference for all Lake Module file types. Default Module files are located in the Default Modules folder and can be accessed and recalled utilizing the MODULE STORE/RECALL menu.
9.1 Module Types Overview
Within the Contour Module category, there are four distinct types of Module:
1. Classic Crossover Modules (featuring Bessel, Butterworth, and Linkwitz-Riley crossovers, available with roll-off ranging from 6 dB/octave to 48 dB/octave).
2. Auxiliary Output Modules (provides EQ only functionality with a single input mix to multiple outputs when in Contour Mode).
3. Linear Phase Crossover Modules (providing zero phase distortion with steep transition slopes using FIR filters).
4. FIR Modules (combination of FIR filters, Classic crossovers, and output-specific driver EQ) - only available on PLM Series devices via the import of EAW Greybox files (.gyx), providing support for EAW
Focusing.
The MESA EQ Module category provides a signal Module type of MESA EQ, that it defaulted for use as a single input to single output, full bandwidth EQ Module and also provides HPF/LPF functionality.
9.2 Supplementary Module Data
Any Module file may contain additional parameters relating to the PLM output stage, including Amplifier
Gain and ISVPL™ limiter. These parameters are used when the file is loaded into a PLM device and ignored when loaded into another Lake device; these parameters are retained and passed through to new Module files via the Module/System Store commands.
Additionally, loudspeaker electrical characteristic parameters (termed Fingerprint and used for load verification (LoadSmart™) and monitoring (SpeakerSafe™) for PLM devices) are stored and recalled via a supplementary “.mdl” file with the same filename. This Fingerprint file must be present in the same directory as the Module file; it is stored and recalled for PLM devices, and ignored for other Lake devices. Fingerprint data may be reconnected with a Module file simply by renaming or moving the mdl file to ensure it has the same filename and directory location as its associated Module file.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
155
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
9.3 Module Type Abbreviations
Figure 9-1 identifies the Module type abbreviation code.
Figure 9-1: Module Icon indicating Module Type Code
Table 9-1 describes the various abbreviation codes along with the associated Module description.
Abbr.
Description
1 1-Auxiliary Outputs
2 Classic 2-Way or 2-Auxiliary Outputs
2+1 Classic 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs
3 Classic 3-Way or 3-Auxiliary Outputs
3+1 Classic 3-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs
4
5
Classic 4-Way or 4-Auxiliary Outputs
Classic 5-Way or 5-Auxiliary Outputs
Table 9-1:
6 Classic 6-Way or 6-Auxiliary Outputs
LP2 Linear Phase 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs
LP3 Linear Phase 3-Way
LP4 Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way
FIR1 FIR 1-Way
FIR2 FIR 2-Way
FIR3 FIR 3-Way
MEq Mesa EQ
Module Type Abbreviations
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
The Mesa EQ Module can only be used on LM
Series and MY8-LAKE devices.
The FIR Modules can only be used on PLM Series devices.
9.4 Classic Crossovers/Auxiliary Outputs
This section describes the available combinations of classic crossovers and shows the default signal path for each configuration.
Classic 2- or 3-Way Modules, or any Module with requiring less than three channels, may be used in any combination on a Lake device. Linear Phase 2-Way and 3-Way Modules may also be recalled in any combination alongside classic crossover Modules.
Classic 4-, 5-, and 6-Way Modules, as well as Modules requiring more than three channels, are provided as fixed configuration options. A Module with more than three channels may only be recalled into Module A or
C and, in most cases, the remaining outputs of the device can be configured to provide other crossovers and auxiliary outputs.
9.4.1 Classic 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs
The CL2w+1a Module provides an auxiliary output that can be driven by the post-input EQ signal, or its own independent input mix. By default, the auxiliary output is driven by the post-input EQ signal.
If you switch the auxiliary channel to receive input from its own input mixer, the auxiliary channel will no longer be muted by the Module input mute control. The auxiliary channel can be muted by the channel’s output mute control.
Figure 9-2: Classic 2-Way+1-Auxiliary Outputs
To change the auxiliary output to receive its own independent input mix, tap the switch selector box labeled
POST EQ.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
157
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
9.4.2 Classic 3-Way and 3-Auxiliary Outputs
The signal paths for both of these Module types look similar, but the Classic 3-Way (shown in Module A) has a single crossover page providing specific frequency bands from each output.
The 3-Auxiliary Outputs Module provides three full-bandwidth channels per Module. Each of these outputs can be configured independently as required using traditional high-pass and low-pass filters, which are available on each independent Auxiliary Output page.
Figure 9-3: Classic 3-Way and 3-Auxiliary Outputs
The Classic 2-Way, Classic/Linear Phase 2-Way +
1-Auxiliary Outputs, Classic/Linear Phase 3-Way, and Classic 3-Auxiliary Outputs Modules can be used in any combination on all available Modules.
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
9.4.3 Classic 3-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs (with Classic 2-Way/2-Aux)
The Classic 3-Way + 1-Auxiliary Output (CL3w+1a) Module allows the remaining two output channels to be configured as either Classic 2-Way or 2-Auxiliary Outputs.
Separate input EQ (PEQ/GEQ) is available for the CL3w+1a and the 2-Way/2-Aux Modules.
As with the Classic 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs Modules, the Auxiliary channel on the CL3w+1a can be fed
POST INPUT EQ, or from its own independent Input Mixer.
Figure 9-4: Classic 3-Way+1-Aux with Classic 2-Way
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
159
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
9.4.4 Classic 4-Way/4-Aux (with Classic 2-Way/2-Aux)
The Classic 4-Way (CL4way) or 4-Auxiliary Outputs (4aux) Modules allow the remaining two output channels to be configured as either Classic 2-Way or 2-Auxiliary Outputs.
Separate input EQ (PEQ/GEQ) is available for the Classic 4-Way/4-Aux and the 2-Way/2-Aux Modules
Figure 9-5: Classic 4-Way with Classic 2-Way
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
9.4.5 Classic 5-Way/5-Aux (with 1-Auxiliary Outputs)
The Classic 5-Way (CL5way) or 5-Auxiliary Outputs (5aux) Module provides an auxiliary channel on output 6.
Separate input EQ (PEQ/GEQ) is available for the Classic 5-Way/5-Aux and the 1-Auxiliary (1aux) Output
Modules
Figure 9-6: Classic 5-Way with 1-Auxiliary Outputs
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
161
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
9.4.6 Classic 6-Way/6-Auxiliary Outputs
The Classic 6-Way (CL6way) or 6-Auxiliary Outputs (6aux) Modules use a single Module input mix with the output split to all six output channels.
Figure 9-7: Classic 6-Way
9.5 Linear Phase Crossovers
Linear phase modules utilize FIR filters to create steep transition slopes to divide the frequency bands. The phase response of all channels summed together is flat and therefore all frequencies are equally delayed which results in no phase distortion. Linear phase crossovers are available as 2-, 3-, and 4-Way Module types.
9.5.1 Linear Phase 2-Way (+1-Auxiliary Outputs)
The Linear Phase 2-Way (LP2way) provides an auxiliary channel with traditional HPF/LPF for each Module
(LP2w+1a).
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
Figure 9-8: Linear Phase 2-Way + 1-Auxiliary Outputs
9.5.2 Linear Phase 3-Way
The Linear Phase 3-Way (LP3way) has a similar signal path to the Classic 3-Way (CL3way).
Figure 9-9: Linear Phase 3-Way
9.5.3 Linear Phase 2-/3-Way EQ/MaxPeak combinations
The LP2 and LP3way Modules use a significant amount of processing power to create steep crossovers with flat phase response. For this reason, the full amount of output-specific EQ filters can only be used if the MaxPeak is disabled on the Module, as the MaxPeak Limiter also requires a large amount of processing.
The MaxPeak Limiter process is disabled when the total MaxPeak level (including Group and factory settings) is 25 dBu or greater. The following crossover EQ filters for the LP2 and LP3way are available:
▸
MaxPeak Activated:
▸
MaxPeak Deactivated:
10 EQ Filters + High-pass Filter
15 EQ Filters + High-pass Filter
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
163
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
9.5.4 Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way
The Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way (LP4way) uses the processing power of two Modules to create extrasteep crossovers.
Figure 9-10: Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way
9.6 FIR Module [PLM Series Devices Only]
PLM Series devices support the FIR Module type, which incorporates a combination of FIR and IIR technology. The extensive FIR filters can be used to create both crossovers and driver EQ. The phase can be absolutely controlled rendering linear phase, minimum phase, or arbitrary phase filters. The IIR filters can be used to create classic crossovers and specific driver EQ.
FIR modules supports EAW Focusing through direct import of EAW greybox files into the Lake Controller.
The latest EAW greybox files can be downloaded via: http://www.eaw.com/downloads/
9.6.1 FIR 1-Way for EAW Greybox Import [PLM Series Devices Only]
The FIR 1-Way (FIR1) is a FIR/IIR processing program capable of EAW Focusing, and uses the processing power of two Modules. This program is activated by recalling a EAW Greybox (.gyx) file in the
Lake Controller.
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
Figure 9-11: FIR 1-Way
9.6.2 FIR 2-Way for EAW Greybox Import [PLM Series Devices Only]
The FIR 2-Way (FIR2) is a FIR/IIR processing program capable of EAW Focusing, and uses the processing power of two Modules. This program is activated by recalling a EAW Greybox (.gyx) file in the
Lake Controller.
Figure 9-12: FIR 2-Way
9.6.3 FIR 3-Way for EAW Greybox Import [PLM Series Devices Only]
The FIR 3-Way (FIR3) is a FIR/IIR processing program capable of EAW Focusing, and uses the processing power of two Modules. This program is activated by recalling a EAW Greybox (.gyx) file in the
Lake Controller.
Figure 9-13: FIR 3-Way
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
165
Module File Types & LoadLibrary™
9.7 Mesa EQ Module
The Mesa EQ Module type is abbreviated as MEq on the Module icon. The Mesa EQ provides EQ only (with
HPF/LPF) functionality.
Figure 9-14: Mesa EQ
9.8 LoadLibrary
The LoadLibrary is a collection of Module files and Frame Presets that are distributed with the
Lake Controller. LoadLibrary presets can include individual or sets of Contour or Mesa Module files, and can also include additional parameters specific to certain devices either within the Module file itself, or via a
supplementary .mdl file as explained in section 9.2.
The LoadLibrary can include:
1. Presets designed by the loudspeaker manufacturer
2. Presets designed by Lab.gruppen
3. Presets designed by the Lake community (end-users)
Groups Menu Reference
10. Groups Menu Reference
Groups provide powerful control over all Modules in a system. Modules can be assigned to multiple Groups, and each Module can be a member of up to 28 different Groups.
Groups enable several important functions, including the following:
1. Master EQ and Levels control over an entire system
2. EQ and Levels control over subsections of a system (for example, speaker clusters)
3. HPF/LPF/Crossover/Auxiliary Output ganging, allowing a change to a crossover or output-specific EQ to be reflected across all Modules of the same type within the Group
4. Simplified control over multiple speakers or zones
Once the speakers are configured, the Modules that control each speaker’s response can be locked using
Designer Mode security features; alternatively, individual Modules can be placed on a separate page, leaving
Groups to simplify the overall control of the audio system.
Multiple Groups can be used to logically partition a large-scale loudspeaker system. For instance, Modules driving the left loudspeaker array can be grouped to create a left sub-master, or Groups can be used to control the center cluster, side-array, side-fill, down-fill, front-fill, and delay systems. A master Group can be created to enable a system-wide interface for EQ and Levels, allowing instant adjustments to all Lake devices on the network.
10.1 Adding a Group
Tap the GROUPS button from the HOME menu. The available Group icons appear in the scroll bar. Most options in the button bar appear gray and are inactive until a Group is moved from the scroll bar to the work area.
Figure 10-1: Groups Menu
▸ Group 1 (empty) is being used in the current system configuration.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
167
Groups Menu Reference
▸
Group 2 (gray) is assigned to a Module that is not a part of the current system configuration.
▸
Groups 3 through 28 are available for use and are not currently assigned to any other Modules.
Tap and drag the scroll bar to the left/right or tap the << or >> buttons to access additional Group icons.
To add a Group to the system configuration, perform the following steps:
1. Tap a Group icon on the scroll bar. The cursor changes to the Group icon.
2. Tap somewhere in the work area to add the Group to your system configuration.
3. Follow the instructions in section 9.3 to assign Modules to the Group.
10.2 EQ/Levels
Tap the EQ/LEVELS button from GROUPS to display the parametric EQ, graphic EQ, and Levels screens for the selected Group. This function is active only when a Group is selected in the work area.
Module level limits are always adhered to when Group levels are changed. If one Module in the Group would exceed its level limit as a result of a change to Group data, then the change will not be allowed.
Level limits can be adjusted in Designer Mode.
10.3 Assign
Changes made to the Group EQ/Levels affect only those Modules assigned to that Group. Before assigning
Modules to a Group, make sure the required Modules and Groups are in the work area and navigate to the
Groups menu.
To assign Modules to a Group, perform the following steps:
1. Tap ASSIGN to activate the function.
2. Tap a Group icon. The icon illuminates yellow.
3. Tap each Module icon you wish to assign to that Group. Each Module icon’s border illuminates yellow indicating it is assigned to the selected Group.
4. Tap ASSIGN to deactivate the function.
Groups Menu Reference
Module Group assignments can be verified by selecting a Group icon in the work area. The selected Group
and associated Module icons will display yellow borders as shown in Figure 10-2.
Figure 10-2: Group Assignment Indication
Modules will not allow assignment of Group/s if it will result in level limits being exceeded. Warning messages will be displayed if a Group assignment would cause the Module to exceed its level limits.
The first Module assigned to the Group will be used for Group level metering purposes. This metering assignment can be changed later if
required; please refer to section 7.2.8.
10.4 Label
The Group label is a user-defined value at the bottom of the Group icon that is useful for identifying the part of the sound system to which the Group communicates (front of house, monitors, down-fill, and so on).
To label a Group, perform the following steps:
1. Tap the desired Group icon.
2. Tap LABEL and enter a Group label.
3. Tap OK.
10.5 Copy/Paste
Select a Group in the work area, and tap COPY/PASTE to view a submenu that transfers attributes between
Groups.
10.5.1 Copy
The COPY button is active only when a Group icon is selected. To copy data from a Group, tap the Group icon that contains the data to be copied, then tap COPY.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
169
Groups Menu Reference
10.5.2 Paste
The PASTE button is active only when Group data has been previously copied and a Group icon is selected.
To paste data to a Group, tap the Group icon in which to paste the copied data then tap PASTE.
The Paste operation overwrites all the destination
Group’s EQ and Levels settings, but not the Module label or Module assignments.
10.6 Remove
This function removes the selected Group from the current system configuration. To remove a Group, select the Group icon, tap REMOVE, then tap YES to the warning message.
The warning message is displayed only if the Group has Modules assigned to it. The Group icon reappears in the scroll bar indicating it is not currently in use.
A Group can also be removed by dragging the icon back to the GROUPS scroll bar.
10.7 Gang
Tapping this button activates a scroll bar containing all Modules currently assigned to the selected Group, along with a submenu.
Figure 10-3: Group Gang Menu
10.7.1 Gang Xover/Aux or Gang HPF/LPF
This button read GANG XOVER/AUX when a Group containing Contour Modules is selected, and GANG
HPF/LPF when a Group containing Mesa EQ Modules is selected. These functions allow the crossovers, auxiliary output channels, and HPF/LPF settings of Modules on different Frames to be linked together.
Groups Menu Reference
▸
When GANG XOVER/AUX is active on a Group containing crossover Modules, the crossovers, HPF/LPF, and auxiliary channels of all Modules in the Group are synchronized. A change made in one Module will be reflected in all Modules of that Group.
▸
When Gang HPF/LPF is active on a Group containing Mesa EQ Modules, the HPF/LPF will be linked on all Modules in the Group.
To gang the crossover or HPF/LPF of all Modules in a Group, perform the following steps:
1. Assign the Modules to a Group. All Modules must be of the same crossover type, such as Classic
3-Way (CL3way), for example.
All Modules must be of the same Module type, such as a Classic 3-Way (CL3way), for example.
2. From the GROUPS menu, tap GANG.
3. Tap the Module on the scroll bar to select which Module’s settings will be transferred to all other
Modules in the Group.
4. Tap GANG XOVER/AUX (Contour Modules) or GANG HPF/LPF (Mesa EQ Modules).
5. Tap YES to the warning message.
Only the XOVER/AUX/HPF/LPF and associated
OUTPUT EQ data is ganged. LEVELS data and
INPUT EQ (PEQ/GEQ) cannot be ganged. Use
Group EQ/LEVELS to control multiple Modules.
To synchronize all data across multiple Modules, you can use the powerful SUPER MODULE
feature. Refer to section 8.8 for details.
10.8 Add Page
The ADD PAGE function is always available from the GROUPS menu and creates additional pages that help manage large systems with many Module and Group icons.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
171
Solo/Mute Menu Reference
11. Solo/Mute Menu Reference
The functionality provided by the SOLO/MUTE menu provides an invaluable tool for the sound engineer during system setup and optimization. The solo function allows specific Module or Groups to be isolated, instantly muting the rest of the system. This allows for rapid measurement and analysis, including lobe studies in large, complex systems.
Tap SOLO/MUTE from the HOME menu. This action displays a submenu with mute and solo functions for
Modules and Groups.
11.1 EQ/Levels
Tap EQ/LEVELS from the SOLO/MUTE menu to display the parametric EQ, graphic EQ, XOVER, and
LEVELS screens for the selected Module or Group. This function is active only when a Module or Group icon has been selected.
When SOLO/MUTE is enabled, EQ/LEVELS can only be accessed for a Module that is in SOLO mode.
The ability to access EQ/LEVELS from the SOLO/MUTE button bar is necessary as the Lake Controller will exit SOLO/MUTE mode when you navigate to other areas of the user interface. This is a safety feature to ensure that no Modules or Groups are left accidentally muted.
Additionally, context switching is also disabled to ensure that no Modules or Groups are left accidentally muted.
11.2 Solo/Mute Enable
Tap SOLO/MUTE ENABLE button to toggle the SOLO/MUTE functionality ON (orange) and OFF (blue).
While the SOLO/MUTE function is on, icons are red when muted or green when in solo mode. All Modules default to solo mode when SOLO/MUTE is first turned on.
Tap a Module or Group icon to keep solo mode active on that Module (or all Modules in the selected Group) and mute all other Modules in the system. Tap the same icon again to UNMUTE all Modules.
Figure 11-1 shows Module B of a Frame in solo mode. The other two Module icons are muted through the
SOLO/MUTE function.
Solo/Mute Menu Reference
Figure 11-1: Solo/Mute
11.3 Pile
The Pile function allows for multiple Modules or Groups to solo at the same time.
1. Tap SOLO/MUTE ENABLE from the SOLO/MUTE menu. The button illuminates orange.
2. Tap PILE. The button illuminates orange.
3. Tap a Module or Group icon to solo. Repeat for other Modules or Groups to solo.
4. Tap SOLO/MUTE ENABLE again to exit this function.
11.4 All Mute
To mute all Modules in a system, perform the following steps:
1. Tap SOLO/MUTE ENABLE from the SOLO/MUTE menu. The button illuminates orange.
2. Tap ALL MUTE.
3. Tap SOLO/MUTE ENABLE or SOLO/MUTE EXIT to resume normal status.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
173
Icon Control Menu Reference
12. Icon Control Menu Reference
The functionality provided through the ICON CONTROL menu allows configuration icon size and an option to change the icons to show input and output metering. Pages can be configured to provide an overview of all Modules on the network, providing a system-monitoring interface including both level and limiting activity.
12.1 Meters On/Off
This feature is active for Modules and Groups when an icon is selected. Meters on the icon display input and output levels, limiting, clipping, and the Module label.
Figure 12-1: Icon Metering
To toggle meters on and off:
1. Tap ICON CONTROL from the HOME menu.
2. Tap METERS ON/OFF. The button illuminates orange.
3. Tap the Module or Group icon to toggle between METERS ON/OFF.
4. Tap METERS ON/OFF again to exit this mode.
The ICON SMALL, ICON NORMAL, ICON MEDIUM, and ICON LARGE buttons are active only when a
Module or Group icon is selected from the main work area and the METERS ON/OFF mode is not selected.
(i.e. The METERS ON/OFF button is blue.)
12.2 Icon Small/Normal/Medium/Large
Tap these icon size buttons to change the size of the selected Module, Super Module, or Group icon.
User Preferences Menu Reference
13. User Preferences Menu Reference
The User Preferences menu provides various functions for customizing of the Lake Controller interface.
Tap USER PREFERENCES from the HOME menu to display a submenu containing functions and various additional menus. These functions change settings globally throughout the system.
13.1 Contexts
Contexts allow up to eight views to be stored and retrieved easily using the CONTEXT button, which is
available on the far left of the button bar on most screens, identified at [A] in Figure 13-1.
.
Figure 13-1: Context View Options
The Context menu enables selection of the number of views to be available throughout the system.
To set up four contexts in your system, perform the following steps:
1. From HOME, tap USER PREFERENCES.
2. Tap CONTEXT, then tap the button labelled [4].
3. Tap HOME.
4. Navigate to the first screen.
5. Tap the numbered context button [A] to move to the next view.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all four contexts are configured.
Tapping the CONTEXT button now allows you to switch instantly between these views.
The last screen viewed is stored under the currently selected context number.
13.2 Delay Units
The DELAY UNITS preference selection is reflected throughout the Lake Controller interface.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
175
User Preferences Menu Reference
This menu provides the option for values to be entered and viewed in feet and meters. Tap the relevant button to change to your required default setting. The system default is milliseconds.
Delay calculations in meters and in feet are performed with the speed of sound being 343.6 meters
(1127.3 feet) per second. This is the speed of sound as calculated for an ambient temperature of
20 degrees Celsius (68 degrees Farenheit).
13.3 Designer Functions
DESIGNER FUNCTIONS provide a gateway to Designer Mode, an advanced mode of the Lake Controller that provides the engineer with the ability to secure various aspects of the user interface.
13.3.1 Change Password
The CHANGE PASSWORD function is active only when Designer Mode is on. It allows a system designer to password protect access to Designer Mode.
13.3.2 Designer Mode
Tap DESIGNER MODE to toggle Designer Mode ON (orange) and OFF (blue). With DESIGNER MODE ON, the user can access and adjust additional functions throughout the system, including the following:
▸ Global and Individual Overlay access security settings
▸ Crossover and HPF/LPF access security settings
▸ Hidden channels
▸ Factory settings and Level Limits
When DESIGNER MODE is active, the text Designer Mode is displayed on the status bar as shown .
Figure 13-2: Designer Mode Help Text
13.3.3 Global Access
GLOBAL ACCESS function is active only when Designer Mode is on. It allows a system designer to hide or
set parts of the system to VIEW ONLY. Refer to chapter 18 for further details.
User Preferences Menu Reference
13.4 Keyboard Shortcuts
The KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS button enables (orange) or disables (blue) keyboard shortcut functionality. For
details on all available keyboard shortcuts, please refer to chapter 18.
13.5 About
Tap the ABOUT button to view the current Lake Controller software version. Tap anywhere on the display to return to the previous view.
13.6 Graphics
13.6.1 Auto Icon Arrange
This button is on by default, automatically placing icons so they do not overlap each other.
13.6.2 Screen Capture
This button changes the UNDO button into a SCREEN CAPTURE button, which stores a bitmap of any screen in the system to the data/user/printout folder in your Lake Controller installation directory.
13.6.3 Animate
This button is on by default, enabling various animation and graphic effects during use of the Lake Controller.
For slower computers or when connecting via remote desktop, it is recommend that this feature is disabled.
13.6.4 Daylight Mode
Daylight Mode provides high-contrast graphics on a white background, making the Controller easier to view under daylight conditions.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
177
User Preferences Menu Reference
Figure 13-3: Lake Controller in Daylight Mode
Figure 13-4:
Tap the DAYLIGHT MODE button to toggle between normal graphics settings (black background) and the high contrast daylight view (white background).
13.7 Show Mode
Tap SHOW MODE to toggle ON (orange) and OFF (blue). SHOW MODE can be activated during a show to prevent accidental changes. When SHOW MODE is on:
▸
MUTE and POLARITY buttons are disabled on all LEVELS screens.
▸
INPUT MIXER and INPUT MUTE controls are disabled.
▸
All changes to EQ and LEVELS are restricted to fine adjustments.
▸
All XOVER screens become unavailable.
▸
All HOME menu options are disabled except USER PREFERENCES and NETWORK.
Pages Menu Reference
14. Pages Menu Reference
Tap the PAGES button from the HOME menu to display a submenu with functions that manage the main work area of the system, along with the Module and Group icons. The default system setting is a single page, labelled MAIN. Large systems with many Modules and Groups may require additional pages.
The functions described in this chapter may be used to manage pages and copy or move icons across the pages. The following example shows a configuration containing three pages: one containing Groups for main front-of-house EQ and Levels, another for monitor EQ and Levels, and another to store all the Module icons.
Figure 14-1: Lake Controller Pages
14.1 Cut Icon
The CUT ICON button is active only when a Module or Group icon is selected. To move an icon from one page to another, perform the following steps:
1. Tap a Module or Group icon on the work area.
2. Tap CUT ICON.
3. Select another page using the tabs at top of the screen, or tap ADD PAGE if no other pages exist.
4. Tap PASTE ICON.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
179
Pages Menu Reference
14.2 Copy Icon
The COPY ICON button is active only when a Module or Group icon is selected. More than one copy of an icon can exist on different pages.
To copy an icon, perform the following steps:
1. Tap a Module or Group icon on the work area.
2. Tap COPY ICON.
3. Select another page using the tabs at top of screen, or tap ADD PAGE if no other pages exists.
4. Tap PASTE ICON.
There can be only one instance of an icon on each page.
14.3 Paste Icon
The PASTE ICON button is active only after a CUT ICON or COPY ICON action. When tapped, this button will paste a copy of the icon currently in memory to the currently selected page.
Icons can also be moved by selecting and dragging the icon to a page tab at the top of the screen.
Select and drag the icon/s to the required page tab then release in the required location.
14.4 Page Label
The PAGE LABEL button is always active.
To label a page, perform the following steps:
1. Select the page to be labeled (top of screen).
3.
4.
Enter the label using either the on-screen or external keyboard.
Tap OK.
Pages Menu Reference
14.5 Page Delete
This function deletes the selected page, including all Module and Group icons, which return to the Module and Group scroll bars.
PAGE DELETE is inactive if the MAIN page or the
ALL page is selected..
14.6 Page Add
Tap the ADD PAGE button to add another page to the Lake Controller interface.
14.7 Page Hide
This button is active only in Designer Mode and is used for hiding pages. For further information, please
14.8 Scrolling Pages
The << and >> buttons on the button bar activate if there are more pages than can fit across the screen. Tap these buttons to view pages that are currently out of view.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
181
Network Menu Reference
15. Network Menu Reference
This chapter provides information on the Network menu functions in the Lake Controller. For additional
tion Guide and Dante configuration literature included in the Lake Controller installation.
15.1 Network
Tap NETWORK to display the network adapters used to connect the Lake Controller to the network. This feature can be used to switch between network adapters or to work offline.
2. Tap the required network connection on the scroll bar.
Figure 15-1: Network Menu
If multiple adapters are enabled, any adapters other than the currently selected adapter may be disabled to avoid communication errors.
▸ To disable an adapter, tap the desired network adapter in the scroll bar and tap DISABLE NETWORK.
▸ To enable a currently disabled adapter, tap on the desired network adapter and tap ENABLE NETWORK.
▸ To update information about the currently selected network adapter, tap the desired network adapter and tap REFRESH NETWORK.
▸
To enable multiple Controllers to be connected to the same network, tap the desired network adapter
and tap MULTIPLE CONTROLLERS. Please refer to section 15.2 for further details.
Network Menu Reference
15.2 Multiple Controllers
15.2.1 Overview and Menu Options
The Lake Controller system allows multiple Controllers to be connected to the same network. When in this mode, certain functionality is restricted.
The first Controller to connect to a network is called the primary Controller. Any subsequent Controllers are referred to as secondary Controllers.
The following options are available on the MULTIPLE CONTROLLERS submenu:
15.2.1.1 Multi Cont Enable
This button is available only on the primary Controller and is disabled (gray) on any secondary Controllers.
When this button is active (orange), multiple Controllers are allowed on the same network. When the button is inactive (blue), only one Controller is allowed on the network.
15.2.1.2 Confirmation Required
This button is available only on the primary Controller and is disabled (gray) on any secondary Controllers.
When this button is active (orange), a confirmation dialog box is displayed on the primary Controller when a secondary Controller attempts to connect. If this button is inactive (blue), then additional Controllers are able to connect to the network without primary Controller approval.
15.2.1.3 Analyzer Enable
This button provides the option to disable analyzer data on a per-controller basis (useful when using multiple
Controllers). If this button is active (orange), analyzer data will be displayed on this Controller. If this button is inactive (blue), analyzer data will not be displayed. This button is disabled (gray) if the analyzer is not available.
15.2.2 Primary and Secondary Controllers
The primary Lake Controller communicates with the network of Lake devices, and also with secondary
Controllers. The secondary Controllers communicate only via the primary Controller.
The date, time and time-zone must be synchronized on all computers for multiple controller functionality to work correctly, and ensure firewalls are correctly configured to allow Lake Controller data.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
183
Network Menu Reference
The primary Controller can be used in either Designer or User Mode (in which various Designer Mode functions will be restricted). Secondary Controllers are always restricted to a limited version of User Mode operation.
The primary Controller must have a connection to the network for secondary Controllers to function.
If communication is lost between the primary Controller and the network, all secondary Controllers are suspended with a warning message displayed until the network connection returns.
If the primary Controller is restarted, all secondary Controllers must also be restarted.
If the Controllers become out of sync with the network, the primary Controller must be used to synchronize the network.
In a multiple Controller environment, it is recommended that the primary Controller is either wired to the network or kept within range of the wireless transmitter to ensure that all Controllers can function without interruption.
When using multiple Controllers, each Controller must have a unique IP address.
15.2.3 Restricted Functionality
Various functionality is restricted when multiple Controller mode is active. The following figure shows the top-levels menus that are available from the HOME menu when multiple Controllers enabled; the buttons shown in gray are unavailable.
Note the **PRIMARY** label on the far right of the help text identifies the Controller status and reads
**SECONDARY** for all secondary Controllers.
Figure 15-2: Limited Functionality using Multiple Controllers
From within the SYSTEM STORE/RECALL and MODULES menus, both primary and secondary Controllers can STORE SYSTEM files and use the REPLACE FRAME functionality; most other functions in these menus are disabled. SOLO/MUTE functionality is available on both primary and secondary Controllers.
Certain functions on the EQ/LEVELS/XOVER screens are also disabled in multiple Controller mode; any unavailable function is identified by a gray button.
To restore full functionality, the primary Controller has the ability to disable multiple Controllers using the
MULTI CONT ENABLE button. Disabling multiple Controllers disconnects all secondary Controllers. The
Network Menu Reference
primary Controller can re-enable multiple Controller mode in the same session and the secondary Controllers will automatically reconnect.
If multiple Controller mode is disabled then restored by the primary Controller, the system configuration will be transferred again to all secondary Controllers to ensure data is synchronized.
15.2.4 Using the Analyzer with Multiple Lake Controllers
If a compatible analyzer is available on the network, Analyzer data can be transmitted and displayed on all
Controllers that have the ANALYZER ENABLE button activated.
Each Controller has the ability to disable the analyzer independently. One Controller can view analyzer data while other Controllers continue working without the analyzer data being displayed.
To enable/disable analyzer data on a Controller, perform the following steps:
2. Toggle the ANALYZER ENABLE button (orange equals enabled; blue equals disabled).
15.3 Working Offline
Working offline enables the Lake Controller to be used even if a network is not enabled or present. This allows offline setup of system configurations.
Therefore, systems can be created or modified when the network of Lake devices is unavailable. To work offline, start the Controller without a network adapter enabled, or select OFFLINE during initial network selection on startup, or tap the NETWORK button and select the network card graphic labeled OFFLINE from the scroll bar.
A large majority of functions can be used when offline, although some hardware-specific configuration functions are not accessible.
If an existing system configuration has been modified and stored while offline, the new values will take effect when the system configuration is recalled with an online Lake device network.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
185
Network Menu Reference
15.3.1 Virtual Frames
Virtual Frames can be used while working offline. A Virtual Frame provides the same functions as online
Modules; Module files can be recalled, stored, copied and pasted, and the Virtual Frames can be stored as part of a system configuration.
The Module scroll bar always contains the following Virtual Frame configurations that represent the Lake device range of products.
Figure 15-3: Virtual Frame Icons
To use Virtual Frames, perform the following steps:
1. Tap the Virtual Frame icon that you require. The cursor will represent the relevant number of Module icons.
2. Place the Virtual Frame in the work area. The majority of functions are available, enabling full offline configuration.
Virtual Frames do not have a device identifier, and therefore a replace function is used to assign the Module to an online Lake device.
Refer to section 4.3 for details about Contour and Mesa Modules.
15.3.2 Replacing Virtual Frames with an Online Device
The MODULE STORE/RECALL or COPY/PASTE/REPLACE functions can be used to transfer the data from a Virtual Frame to an online Frame.
Individual Modules created offline can be stored as Module files and recalled into an online device.
Offline system configurations can be stored and recalled, and then each Frame can be replaced with an online device.
Please refer to section 8.4.3 for detailed information on the REPLACE FRAME functionality
Communication and Synchronization
16. Communication and Synchronization
The Lake Controller and Lake devices communicate via an Ethernet network. All updates made using the
Controller are transmitted in real time to the network of devices. Both the Controller and the devices store all required information, which results in two copies of the data for each Module:
▸ A copy stored in the Lake Controller software
▸ A copy stored in the Lake device hardware (aka Processor)
This data redundancy ensures an extremely high level of confidence in communicating over an Ethernet network that can be subjected to other network traffic, as well as interference or lost data packets due to a noisy transport such as wireless Ethernet configurations.
If there is ever a discrepancy found between these two data records, the Controller immediately notifies the user that the two data records are out of sync, and provides a choice to either continue using the settings on the device (aka Processor) or to use the settings in the Controller software. Discrepancies are typically caused by making adjustments via the device front-panel interface while the Controller is offline.
This chapter provides useful terminology definitions and reference information for dealing with communication and synchronization issues.
16.1 Offline Modules
A Module that cannot be found on the network is referred to as OFFLINE. This can occur for the following reasons:
▸ The device is turned off.
▸ The device is not connected to the network.
▸ The wireless transmitter is out of range or turned off.
▸ Network cabling or hardware is faulty.
Virtual Frames always show offline because they have not been assigned to a device, and therefore exist only in the computer’s data record.
16.2 Communication/Network Errors
The Lake Controller displays communication or network problems highlighted in red at the bottom right of the screen:
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
187
Communication and Synchronization
Figure 16-1: Network Related Warning Messages
If a network problem persists, the affected Modules become offline as described above. To rectify the situation, check all network connections. If using a wireless access point, make sure the computer is within range.
16.3 Synchronization
This section describes the various synchronization processes between the Lake Controller software and
Lake devices.
16.3.1 Resync Process
The resync process ensures that the data in the Lake Controller software and on the Lake devices (aka
Processors) is synchronized, or that the operator is informed of differences between the two copies of data.
The resync process compares the data in the Controller software with that stored on the devices. If differences are found, the Controller software informs the user that Modules are out of sync.
A resync occurs when:
▸ A system configuration file is recalled
▸ An offline Module becomes online
▸ A network or communication error occurs
The Controller provides a general PLEASE WAIT message if any Module is syncing, along with a
RE-SYNCING indication on the Module icon as shown in Figure 16-2.
Communication and Synchronization
Figure 16-2: Please Wait and Re-Syncing Indications
16.3.2 Out of Sync
The Lake Controller and Lake devices could become out of sync for the following reasons:
▸
An update was made using the Controller software while a device was offline.
▸
A communication or network error occurred during an update.
When the affected Modules return online, the Controller compares its data with that in the devices. If differences are found, the Controller highlights which Modules are out of sync.
OUT OF SYNC Modules or related Groups are set to
VIEW ONLY. No further changes can be made until the Lake Controller (Computer) and Lake devices
(Processors) are synchronized.
Audio will not be affected unless the
USE COMPUTER SETTINGS option is selected; in this instance audio may change depending on the differences from the current Processor settings.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
189
Communication and Synchronization
Figure 16-3: Out of Sync Notifications
▸ (A) The red disc behind the Module icon indicates that the Module is out of sync.
▸ (B) Flashing USE DATA ON PROCESSORS button.
▸ (C) Flashing USE DATA IN COMPUTER button.
▸ (D) A warning message appears that is visible from any screen in the system.
16.3.3 Updating All Devices with Computer Settings
To update all devices with the information stored in the Controller, perform the following steps:
1. From the HOME menu, tap the flashing USE DATA IN COMPUTER button.
2. Tap YES on the warning message to confirm the action.
This option may result in an audible effect, as the data in the devices will be overwritten with the data stored in the computer.
16.3.4 Updating the Controller with Device Settings
To update the Lake Controller with the information stored on the devices, perform the following steps:
1. From the HOME menu, tap the flashing USE DATA ON PROCESSORS button.
Communication and Synchronization
2. Tap YES on the warning message to confirm the action.
Audio will not change if this option is selected
16.3.5 Synchronizing the Lake Controller and Devices
In the following example, a communication error occurred while the PEQ1 overlay was being updated using the Controller. Figure 15 2 shows an example of the COMPUTER SETTINGS view, along with letters marking key information.
Figure 16-4: Computer Settings on the PEQ1
The referenced information in Figure 16-4 is described below.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
191
Communication and Synchronization
▸
A OUT-OF-SYNC Modules are set to VIEW ONLY pending synchronization.
▸
B The settings currently viewed are:
COMPUTER - Frame/Module name highlighted in red as offline
PROCESSOR - Frame/Module name displayed in blue text as online
▸
C The main part of the screen changes to show the Computer and Processor settings as selected.
▸
D The help text shown here indicates the type of data that is out of sync.
Navigate to the relevant section of the system to view/update.
▸ E The
▸ F This button changes labels depending on the currently selected view.
SHOW PROCESSOR - when viewing computer settings
SHOW COMPUTER - when viewing device (Processor) settings
▸ G Tapping this button updates either the computer or the device with the settings being viewed.
To compare and update settings stored in the Lake Controller software and Lake devices, perform the following steps:
1. From the HOME menu, tap a Module icon that is out of sync.
An out-of-sync Module is indicated by a red disc behind the normal Module icon.
2. View the help text [D] that advises which parameters are affected.
3. Navigate to the relevant EQ/LEVELS page. Computer settings are displayed by default.
4. Tap SHOW PROCESSOR/SHOW COMPUTER [F] to compare settings.
5. Decide which settings to use, and tap USE THESE SETTINGS.
6. Repeat the process for each out-of-sync Module.
Alternately, all Modules can be updated with the USE DATA IN COMPUTER or USE DATA ON PROCESSOR functions.
16.3.6 Audible Changes when Synchronizing
If a Module becomes out of sync while audio is being processed, choosing to synchronize with the Controller could affect the sound, depending on the values that are out of sync.
If the Controller EQ/XOVER/LEVELS settings differ from those currently used by the device, the audio signal may change or be momentarily muted while settings are configured if USE DATA IN COMPUTER is selected.
Analyzer Plug-in
17. Analyzer Plug-in
17.1 Overview
The analyzer plug-in provides an interface between the Lake Controller and third‐party audio analyzer software products. The plug-in displays measurement results within the Lake Controller, and passes control information from the Lake Controller back to the third-party analyzer software. This communication link can
Figure 17-1: Single host computer
Figure 17-2: Two computers connected across Ethernet network
The analyzer PC (running the third-party analyzer software with associated plug-in functionality) has a wired connection to an Ethernet switch that connects the Lake network. A wireless tablet PC running the
Lake Controller is connected to the same switch using a wireless access point. This configuration allows the analyzer results to be transmitted via a wireless access point to the Lake Controller.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
193
Analyzer Plug-in
Figure 17-3: Example network configuration
tion Manual and your hardware device Operation Manual.
17.2 System Requirements
To use the analyzer plug-in, the following items are required:
1. A Microsoft
®
Windows
®
PC with a fully registered installation of an approved analyzer meeting the computer requirements for the analyzer. Approved analyzers include:
▸ Rational Acoustics Smaart 7 or
▸ AFMG SysTune or
▸ WaveCapture Live‐Capture Light / Live-Capture Pro
▸ Additional third-party analyzers approved in the future
Analyzer Plug-in
2. A Windows PC with an installation of the Lake Controller v6 or later, meeting the Lake Controller
minimum computer requirements as specified in section 2.1.
Operating the Lake Controller and the third‐party analyzer on the same computer may result in slow performance even where the required minimum specifications are met. The Lake Controller is graphic intensive and audio analyzer software FFT calculations are CPU intensive; therefore, the performance of the graphics card is important. A graphics card with slow performance or low video memory will reduce computer performance by the transfer of rendering and display data. Please ensure that the graphics card driver is updated to the latest version available from the graphics card manufacturer; drivers shipped with Microsoft Windows are generic and may not take full advantage of video card resources.
17.3 Analyzer Plug-in Quick Start Guide
The analyzer plug-in relies on correct configuration of the third-party analyzer for the analyzer functionality to operate correctly in the Lake Controller. When the Lake Controller starts, it verifies if an approved and correctly configured analyzer can be found on the local machine or on the selected network.
The following steps may need to be completed in your software analyzer to enable successful connection to the Lake Controller:
1. Start the analyzer software.
2. Enable API / external communication.
3. Create new measurement routing pairs (groups) & associated measurement configurations.
4. Adjust all levels for optimal gain structure and verify generator levels.
5. Start both spectrum and transfer functions and verify measurements are working correctly in the analyzer.
6. Start the Lake Controller.
If the Lake Controller detects a valid analyzer on the network, the F10 button will read ANALYZER, providing
access to the submenu for further controls, please refer to section 17.4 for details.
If the Lake Controller cannot find a valid analyzer the F10 button on PEQ, GEQ, and XOVER overlays will read ANALYZER TAP TO SEARCH. Tapping this button initiates a network search for approved and correctly configured analyzers; during the search the button reads ANALYZER SEARCHING.
Please refer to your analyzer documentation for further information on configuring your chosen third-party analyzer software.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
195
Analyzer Plug-in
17.4 Function Reference
This section details each function of the analyzer functionality available via the Lake Controller software. The
Analyzer submenu provides access to enter the three types of measurement mode: Spectrum, Spectrograph, and Transfer functions. The following sections explain these modes and their functions.
17.4.1 Global Control Functions
The following functions affect the overall operation of the third-party analyzer. These functions are provided on the button bar of the top‐level interface of the Analyzer submenu.
Figure 17-4: Top Level Analyzer submenu
17.4.1.1 Pause
This command pauses the analyzer in all modes of operation, and the last measurement trace remains frozen on the screen. Pause is a toggle command; to resume the analyzer tap the Pause button again.
17.4.1.2 Signal Generator
Tapping this button turns the analyzer’s signal generator on or off. When the button is selected (orange), the
Signal Generator is turned on. Use the third-party analyzer software interface to select the type of generated signal or to adjust the signal generator gain.
17.4.1.3 Measurement Selection
Tapping this button displays a scrollbar displaying available measurement configurations that have been pre-configured in your third-party software analyzer.
17.4.2 Spectrum RTA Measurement Mode
The SPECTRUM real‐time analyzer (RTA) display provides real‐time spectrum analyzer functionality. This display plots the spectrum (magnitude values by frequency) of the channel selected for measurement via the third-party analyzer software. The SPECTRUM RTA plot assigns magnitude to the (vertical) y‐axis and frequency to the (horizontal) x-axis.
When the SPECTRUM button is selected, the Lake Controller will show the SPECTRUM display on EQ and
Auxiliary Overlays.
Analyzer Plug-in
Figure 17-5: Spectrum measurement mode
The y‐axis scale of the SPECTRUM RTA is displayed on the right side of the Lake Controller interface. The
SPECTRUM PROPERTIES button provides access to additional functions.
Figure 17-6: Spectrum Properties submenu
17.4.2.1 Averages
Averaging methods and calculations may vary depending on the analyzer being used and the available options will be displayed in the scrollbar accordingly. Please refer to your analyzer documentation
Upon entering the AVERAGES submenu, the Lake Controller displays a scrollbar with available averaging schemes. Tap the desired averaging period then tap the AVERAGES SELECT button. The status text between the scrollbar and the button-bar shows the active measurement parameters.
Figure 17-7: Averages submenu scrollbar
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
197
Analyzer Plug-in
17.4.2.2 Amplitude Range
▸
Move Primary Up:
Move displayed range upward to show higher magnitudes
▸
Move Primary Down:
Move displayed range downward to show lower magnitudes
▸
Zoom Primary In:
Magnify displayed vertical range for most plot types; narrows magnitude range for Spectrograph
▸
Zoom Primary Out:
Decrease magnification of vertical range for most plot types; widens magnitude range for Spectrograph
17.4.2.3 Banding
The BANDING submenu provides options for the horizontal (x‐axis) scaling of the RTA; whole-octave,
1/3-octave, 1/6-octave, 1/12-octave and 1/24‐octave resolutions.
17.4.3 Spectrograph Measurement Mode
The Spectrograph displays frequency content of an input signal over a period of time. Instead of displaying results for one measurement at a time (whether averaged or instantaneous), as per the Spectrum display, the Spectrograph displays a measurement history over an adjustable period of time.
A Spectrum analyzer displays magnitude values for each fractional octave frequency band indicated by vertical bars of varying height; a Spectrograph indicates the “height” using a range of colors to indicate higher or lower magnitude.
The Spectrograph displays three‐dimensional data (time, frequency, and energy) on a two‐dimensional plot with time on the y‐axis, frequency on the x‐axis, and magnitude represented by color. Exactly which color represents which magnitude value is determined by the magnitude range specified.
Analyzer Plug-in
Figure 17-8: Spectrograph measurement mode
17.4.3.1 Colormap Range
The magnitude range of the Spectrograph colormap is displayed on the top of the Spectrograph display. Two edit fields are provided to adjust the minimum and maximum range values for the colormap. To adjust a value tap either field to display the onscreen keyboard.
Figure 17-9: Colormap range
17.4.3.2 Speed
Two buttons are provided to increase or decrease the speed of the Spectrograph. By adjusting the speed of the Spectrograph, you can increase or decrease the amount of time it takes for data to traverse the display.
Figure 17-10: Speed controls
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
199
Analyzer Plug-in
17.4.3.3 Spectrograph Properties
The Spectrograph measurement mode is controlled by all of the settings under Spectrum Properties, as
detailed in section 17.4.2 on page 196.
17.4.4 Transfer Function Measurement Mode
The analyzer’s real‐time Transfer Function measurement capability is a useful tool for setting up sound system equalizers and crossovers. The Transfer Function is calculated by comparing the signal on input to a system (reference) to the signal on the output of the system (measured).
By comparing what goes into a device or system with what comes out, the transfer function calculates its frequency (magnitude and phase) response very precisely. A major advantage of this dual‐channel approach is that it works with a wide variety of test signals, including music or other recognizable program material.
To make a transfer function measurement, a test signal is split at the source and sent to both the system under test and back through the analyzer as a reference signal. The output of the system under test is returned to the analyzer as the measurement signal.
Figure 17-11: Block-diagram of Transfer function measurement
In Transfer Function mode, calculations are performed using audio data from the two inputs. This data is compared and displayed as a single trace showing the relative magnitude difference between the two signals frequency by frequency.
The default Transfer Function mode Magnitude display plots magnitude values on the y‐axis with 0 dB in the center and positive and negative decibel values above and below the zero line. The x‐axis of the plot shows frequency and is normally displayed in logarithmic scaling with grid lines at octave intervals. On the standard magnitude display, a value of 0 dB for a given frequency data point represents an equal amount of energy
(that is, a relative difference of zero) in both the reference (system input) and measurement (system output) signals at that frequency. A positive or negative decibel value for a given frequency indicates more or less magnitude in the measurement signal relative to the reference signal at that frequency. The Phase display in
Transfer Function mode is a second plot showing the relative difference in phase between the two signals for each frequency.
In most cases there is a distance between the loudspeaker and the measurement microphone. This distance creates a propagation delay (the sound travelling through the air) which must be compensated for.
When a transfer function channel is started a reference channel must be selected. Press FIND to find the delay so the reference signal can be adjusted to the same delay.
Analyzer Plug-in
Figure 17-12: Transfer function measurement mode
The y‐axis scale of the Transfer Function is displayed on the right-side of the Lake Controller interface. The controls at the top of the Transfer Function display provide easy access to common controls as described below.
17.4.4.1 Reseed Avg
Reseed Averages clears the averaging buffers (used to increase the stability of the live traces); the trace will require a short period of time to re-stabilize while the buffers are filled. This function is not available for all analzyers, or may be automated; please refer to your analyzer documentation for further details.
Changing the number of averages, FFT size, or sampling rate, or switching between main display modes, also reseeds the averaging buffers.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
201
Analyzer Plug-in
17.4.4.2 Delay Controls
mode is selected. These controls are used to provide signal alignment between the reference and measurement signals for transfer function measurements.
Figure 17-13: Transfer function delay controls
Delay must be adjusted to provide a meaningful measurement. Delay compensates for the system propagation delay, the time taken to create sound through the system and to travel through the air.
The Delay (ms) value is displayed in the Delay edit field. To change the delay value, tap this edit field and enter the required delay using the onscreen keyboard.
The Delay+ and Delay‐ buttons to the right of the Delay edit field can be used to decrease and increase the current Delay setting by 0.02 milliseconds.
The FIND button identifies the time offset (delay) between two input signals by measuring the impulse response of the device or system under test.
The TRACK button continuously measures and adjusts the delay between the reference and measured signals. This feature is CPU intensive should only be used when the distance between a measurement microphone and the signal under test is constantly changing.
Please refer to individual analyzer documentation for further information.
17.4.4.3 Transfer Properties
The Transfer Properties button at the bottom of the interface provides access to Transfer Function specific functions.
Figure 17-14: Transfer function properties submenu
17.4.4.4 Averages
Please refer to section 17.4.2.1 on page 197.
Analyzer Plug-in
17.4.4.5 Amplitude Range
▸ Move Primary Up: Moves displayed range upward to show higher magnitudes.
▸ Move Primary Down: Moves displayed range downward to show lower magnitudes.
▸ Zoom Primary In: Magnifies the displayed vertical range for most plot types or narrows the magnitude range of the Spectrograph display.
▸ Zoom Primary Out: Decreases magnification of the vertical range of the primary display for most plot types or widens the magnitude range of the Spectrograph display.
17.4.4.6 Smoothing
Smoothing is a graphical averaging available only in Transfer Function mode. This feature helps reduce jagged display on the Transfer Function trace helping to more clearly visualize the overall system response.
Figure 17-15: Smoothing submenu
17.4.4.7 Coherence
Selecting the Coherence button will turn on the Coherence trace display. The Coherence is displayed in red in the top-half of the screen. The Coherence y‐axis scale is displayed in red on the right side of the display.
Coherence is a measure of quality (such as signal to noise ratio and time-matching) between signals in a transfer function measurement. Coherence values are given as a percentage, where 100% equals perfect coherence; values closer to one equal improved quality and therefore more accurate results. It is important to note that low coherence values do not necessarily mean your data is untrustworthy. This is particularly true when making acoustic measurements in environments with many reflections where a lot of averaging is required.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
203
Analyzer Plug-in
Figure 17-16: Coherence display
17.4.4.8 Phase
Selecting the Phase button will turn on the Phase trace display, shown as a blue line across the screen.
Figure 17-17: Transfer Function showing Phase (blue line)
17.4.4.9 Phase Properties
The Phase Properties button provides access to Phase-specific functions.
Analyzer Plug-in
Phase Normal / Phase Alternate
On the default Phase display plot, all phase values are plotted within a 360° range of +180° to –180°, with
0° in the center [wrapped phase]. This 360° range represents one complete cycle of delay at any given frequency. You can also choose to view the phase within a 360° range of 0° to 360° (alternate phase). This is useful if there is a reverse of signal polarity within your transfer function measurement setup. Please refer to your analyzer documentation for further information regarding phase and the implementation of these options.
17.4.4.10 Invert
Pressing the INVERT button swaps the inputs to the Transfer Function calculation, so the analyzer divides the reference signal by the measurement signal. This feature is mainly used when you want to display the inverse (upside‐down) magnitude response curve of an EQ or processor channel to facilitate using the room or system response as a template for setting EQ filters.
Figure 17-18: Invert enabled
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
205
Designer Mode Menu Reference
18. Designer Mode Menu Reference
The Lake Controller software provides two modes of operation: User Mode and Designer Mode. This chapter describes Designer Mode.
18.1 Designer Mode Basics
Various important functions that Designer Mode activates include:
▸ Global Access security
▸ Individual overlay/screen access security
▸ Level Limits
▸ Factory levels (Adjust Factory mode)
▸ Password protection of Modules and base configurations
▸ All-pass filters
▸ Designer Worksheets
▸ Polarity locking
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of these functions. An example system design illustrates the utility of Designer Mode functions. A quick reference guide provides a high-level overview of Designer
Mode functions.
This document refers to loudspeaker Modules in the examples, although all features (with the exception of crossovers) also apply to Mesa EQ Modules.
18.1.1 Security Levels
Designer Mode provides three levels of password-protected security.
18.1.1.1 Global
At the global level, a simple selection makes system-wide changes that affect what can be seen or adjusted in User Mode. A system designer can choose to hide any combination of LEVELS, PEQ, GEQ, XOVER,
AUX, HPF/LPF. These items can also be set to View Only, allowing a User Mode operator to view but not change information as required.
Designer Mode Menu Reference
Global Designer Mode settings are stored in the system configuration file.
18.1.1.2 Module
Individual EQ overlays and crossover tabs can be hidden or set to View Only. Additional settings normally invisible in User Mode can also be adjusted and hidden at the Module level.
At the Module level, changes are specific to individual Modules and Groups. Discrete password protection can be applied to Modules, providing an additional level of security.
18.1.1.3 Base Configuration
Base configuration is the lowest level of Module security, enabling the system designer to define an underlying base EQ curve and crossover settings along with factory levels and level limits. A system designer can restrict what can be seen or adjusted and provide optional password protection to the underlying settings.
The Lake Controller is not shipped with base configuration files. These can be created if required using default Module files.
18.1.2 Designer Mode
The functions available in Designer Mode can be used with or without password protection. By default, the
Designer Mode password is empty, allowing unprotected access to Designer Mode in a new installation of the Lake Controller software.
To access Designer Mode:
1. From Home, tap USER PREFERENCES.
2. Tap DESIGNER FUNCTIONS.
3. Tap DESIGNER MODE.
Additional buttons on the button bar become active, providing functions specific to Designer Mode.
Figure 18-1: Accessing Designer Mode
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
207
Designer Mode Menu Reference
When Designer Mode is active, the label DESIGNER MODE appears before any other help text above the button bar.
Figure 18-2: Designer Mode Help Text
18.1.2.1 Password Protection of Designer Mode
Each software installation has one Designer Mode password. This password is stored on the host computer and is relevant for any system configuration.
To password protect Designer Mode, perform the following steps:
1. Tap CHANGE PASSWORD.
2. Enter a password, and tap OK.
3. Confirm the password, and tap OK.
It is important that you record the Designer Mode password in a safe place. Once the password is set, it will always be required to enter Designer Mode.
If the Designer Mode password is forgotten, please email [email protected] for details on password retrieval.
18.1.2.2 Simple Designer Mode System Security
If multiple levels of security are not required for your Lake Controller installation, exiting Designer Mode activates all security features described in this document without needing to lock or password protect individual Modules or base configuration files.
18.1.3 Designing and Protecting a Lake Controller System
This section describes how to use Designer Mode to protect your system by developing an example system with one Lake device. The example includes detailed instructions to define a base configuration, lock individual Module level settings, and enforce global security
Designer Mode Menu Reference
An online Lake Controller and Lake device network is required for the following tutorial.
18.1.3.1 System Setup for Designer Mode Tutorial
Follow the steps below to prepare for the tutorial.
To access Designer Mode, perform the following steps:
1. From HOME, tap USER PREFERENCES.
2. Tap DESIGNER FUNCTIONS.
3. Tap the Designer Mode button and enter your Designer Mode password if prompted. (If the Designer
Mode button is orange, you are already logged in to Designer Mode.)
4. Tap HOME to return to the MAIN menu.
5. Place the Modules of a factory-reset Lake device in the work area.
To label the Frame and store the system:
1. Tap STORE/RECALL EXIT, then tap LABEL & LOCK.
2. Tap LABEL FRAME, enter ‘Lake’ as the Frame name, and tap OK.
3. Tap HOME, then SYSTEM STORE/RECALL.
4. Navigate to or create a folder in which to store the file.
5. Tap NEW STORE, enter the file name as ‘Designer Mode Tutorial’, and tap OK.
6. Your system configuration is now ready for the following tutorials.
18.2 Designer Mode Security
18.2.1 Security for the Base Configuration
A base configuration file contains EQ, levels, crossover, and HPF/LPF information for a particular speaker type. A base configuration file can be used to create a standard starting point for a particular make and model of speaker; this can then be used in a variety of system configurations and fine-tuned using Module and Group settings.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
209
Designer Mode Menu Reference
The base password is stored with the base configuration file preventing access to locked data even in
Designer Mode. Using a base password allows hiding of your custom settings from any Lake Controller user.
Base Configuration files hide EQ curves, crossovers, or high-pass and low-pass filters, and convert Group and Module levels to hidden Factory values. The use of base configuration files is recommended for experienced Lake Controller users who require this additional level of security and functionality.
Module files provide additional functionality to base configuration files and can be used instead of base configuration files in most circumstances.
18.2.1.1 Crossover and Output EQ
All information in the XOVER screen (Lake Contour) or HPF/LPF screen (Mesa EQ) is stored in the base configuration file, including crossover frequencies, crossover type (for example, Bessel, Butterworth, or
Linkwitz-Riley), along with any output-specific EQ, HPF/LPF settings, and crossover access status. All data in the XOVER screen can be adjusted for each Module, unless the designer has applied security to the base configuration file.
A base configuration file cannot be recalled into a Module running a different DSP program. For example, a two-way base configuration file cannot be recalled into a Module that is currently running a three-way
Module program; a two-way Module program must be recalled first.
18.2.1.2 PEQ and GEQ
All Module and Group EQ overlays are combined and stored as an invisible default EQ curve for the new base configuration. Once stored in the base configuration files, this default EQ curve cannot be viewed or adjusted, although further EQ overlays can be created at the Module or Group level. When the new base configuration file is recalled into a different Module, the main EQ appears flat. Output-specific EQ from the
XOVER or output EQ screens can still be viewed or adjusted, unless the system designer has protected it.
The EQ curve created in the PEQ and GEQ overlays is separate from any output-specific EQ created on the XOVER/AUX pages.
18.2.1.3 Levels
With the exception of the MaxRMS Limiter Corner, Attack and Release, the current Module and Group levels are combined and stored as factory levels when a base configuration file is stored. The factory levels can be viewed and adjusted in Designer Mode after activating the ADJUST FACTORY option in the
LEVELS/METER OPTIONS menu.
Level Limits, also stored with a base configuration file, can be viewed and adjusted from
LEVELS/METER OPTIONS/LEVELS LIMITS.
Designer Mode Menu Reference
18.2.1.4 Base Configuration Tutorial
This tutorial illustrates important features of base configuration files, using loudspeaker Modules as the example. For Mesa EQ Modules, use the only output available on each Module and ignore the steps regarding crossovers.
To adjust levels and level limits, perform the following steps:
1. Navigate to the GAIN levels page of Module A.
2. Adjust the Output 2 gain to –9 dB.
3. Tap the DELAY button and increase Output 3 delay to 6 ms.
4. Tap METER OPTIONS, then tap LEVEL LIMITS.
5. Select GAIN/DELAY LIMITS.
6. Tap the MAX DELAY value highlighted in blue for the input channel. This is located on the left of the screen, second from bottom, and should initially read 1800.00.
7. Enter 0 (zero), and tap OK.
Setting a maximum value identical to the minimum value removes the fader when in User Mode, or when the base configuration file or Module is locked.
To adjust crossover settings, perform the following steps:
8. Tap the EQ tab (top left) and select XOVER (Contour) or HPF/LPF (Mesa EQ).
9. With the first output (low frequency) selected, tap CROSSOVER SELECT.
10. Select 36 dB Butterworth from the scroll bar.
11. Tap CROSSOVER SET, then tap YES to the warning message.
12. Tap HPF ENABLE located at the top left of the screen.
13. Tap XOVER FUNCTIONS from the button bar, then tap CROSSOVER VIEW ONLY. This hides the crossover screen or HPF/LPF screen when in User Mode, or when the base configuration/Module is locked.
To add EQ, perform the following steps:
14. Tap PEQ1 and add a low-shelf filter around 80 Hz, with 3 dB of gain.
15. Tap HOME.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
211
Designer Mode Menu Reference
To lock the base configuration, perform the following steps:
16. Tap MODULES, then tap Module A to select it.
17. Tap LABEL & LOCK. The options shown in Figure 18-3 are displayed.
Figure 18-3: Label & Lock Menu Options
18. Tap SET BASE PASSWORD, type ‘Demo’, and tap OK.
19. Type ‘Demo’ again to confirm, and tap OK to the message.
20. Tap BASE UNLOCKED. This changes to read UNLOCK BASE and the password is now required to unlock this base configuration file.
The XOVER page will be displayed as VIEW ONLY until it is unlocked. Any user, even a system designer, cannot adjust the settings without first unlocking the base configuration file.
LEVEL LIMITS and ADJUST FACTORY options are locked out in both User Mode and Designer Mode, and the input delay fader is removed when in User Mode.
To store the new base configuration file, perform the following steps:
21. Tap LABEL EXIT, then MODULE STORE/RECALL.
22. Tap BASE CONFIGURATION.
23. Navigate to the desired folder location or create a NEW FOLDER.
24. Tap NEW STORE, enter ‘Base Config Test’, and tap OK.
Figure 18-4: Storing a Base Configuration File
Designer Mode Menu Reference
In addition to locking the crossover, HPF/LPF, and EQ of a base configuration file, the entire file can be protected from accidental deletion.
To secure the base configuration file, perform the following steps:
25. Tap FILE UTILITIES.
26. Select the BASE CONFIG TEST base configuration file from the scroll bar.
27. Tap READ ONLY. Notice that the DELETE button is now disabled for this file.
Figure 18-5: Setting a Base Config File to Read Only
For further protection, base configuration file utilities are disabled when in User Mode.
To load the new base configuration file into Module B:
28. Tap FILE UTIL EXIT, then tap the Module B icon to select it.
29. Select the BASE CONFIG TEST file on the scroll bar, and tap RECALL.
30. Tap YES to the warning message.
All data changed during this tutorial is recalled into Module B, and because the base configuration was
Navigate using Module B to verify the changes made to the base configuration file.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
213
Designer Mode Menu Reference
SCENARIO
Factory Levels
Locked
NAVIGATE TO
Levels > Meter Options
The Adjust Factory button normally present is not available until the base configuration file is unlocked.
Level Limits
Locked
The Input Delay
Max Level Limit is set to zero.
Levels > Meter Options
The Level Limits button normally present is not available until the base configuration file is unlocked.
Levels > Delay
Attempt to move the input delay fader, shown in
Designer Mode only. (In User Mode, this delay fader is removed.)
XOVER/HPF/LPF transferred and set to View Only
EQ > XOVER (or HPF/LPF)
EQ is affecting the audio, but cannot be viewed
PEQ and GEQ settings stored in base configuration files cannot be viewed, although an audio comparison can be made between Module A and B to verify they are identical.
Table 18-1: Designer Mode Security Examples
18.2.1.5 Summary
Base configuration files enable low-level security allowing control over individual aspects of the system. The system designer can fine-tune a speaker configuration or system EQ and protect the settings by hiding or setting them as View Only.
The base configuration files can be stored and recalled into other Modules in the same system or in different systems. This provides a starting point from which the Module can be fine-tuned by another designer or user.
The I/O CONFIG screen displays the name of the base configuration file that was originally recalled or most recently stored. I/O CONFIG is located under the MODULES menu.
Designer Mode Menu Reference
18.2.2 Security for Module Functions
All settings that can be protected for a base configurations can also be protected for a Module. Base configuration settings are overwritten by Module settings, unless access has been restricted in the base configuration file, in which case certain parameters will not be accessible. The base configuration file itself will not be affected by any changes made to a Module after the file is recalled.
The Module password is stored with the single Module file, and is stored at the hardware level when recalled into a Lake device. This prevents access to certain data stored in the Module file, even if you are in
Designer Mode in the Lake Controller. Using a Module password allows hiding of your custom settings from any user of the Controller.
The following features are available for both base configuration and Module files:
▸
Adjust and lock factory levels
▸
Adjust and lock access to crossover settings
▸
Hide unused channels
▸
Adjust Level Limits
▸
Disable individual level faders or entire levels sections from other users
In addition to these features, a system designer can also adjust and lock access to individual PEQ and GEQ overlays.
18.2.2.1 Module Tutorial
The following tutorial illustrates Designer Mode’s most important Module features. It also includes some functions that relate to both base configuration and Module files, such as Level Limits. Use the same
and that the base configuration is unlocked before proceeding.
For Mesa EQ Modules, use the only output available on each Module and ignore the steps regarding crossovers.
To add PEQ and set the overlay to View Only, perform the following steps:
1. Navigate to the PEQ1 page of Module A.
2. Add a high-shelf filter (gain: 10 dB; frequency: 10 kHz; bandwidth: 3).
3. Tap OVERLAY FUNCTIONS, then OVERLAY PROPERTIES.
4. Tap OVERLAY VIEW ONLY (illuminates orange).
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
215
Designer Mode Menu Reference
To add GEQ and hide the overlay, perform the following steps:
5. Tap GEQ2.
6. Reduce the 125 Hz filter by 6 dB.
7. Tap OVERLAY HIDE (illuminates orange).
When an EQ overlay is hidden, the effect its filters have on the overall EQ curve is not visible in User
Mode or when the Module is locked.
To remove an unused channel meter and fader, perform the following steps (not applicable for Mesa EQ):
8. Tap the LEVELS tab.
9. Tap LABEL CHANNEL.
10. Tap the MUTE/LABEL button of output 3.
11. Type ‘unused’, and tap OK.
To lock the Module, perform the following steps:
12. Tap Home, then MODULES.
13. Tap the icon for Module A to select it.
14. Tap LABEL & LOCK, then SET MOD PASSWORD.
15. Type ‘demo’, then tap OK.
16. Type ‘demo’ again to confirm, tap OK, then tap OK to the message.
17. Tap MODULE UNLOCKED.
To store the new Module file, perform the following steps:
18. Tap LABEL EXIT, then MODULE STORE/RECALL.
19. Navigate to the required folder.
20. Tap NEW STORE, type demo Module, and tap OK.
To load this new Module file into Module B, perform the following steps:
Designer Mode Menu Reference
21. Tap the icon for Module B.
22. Tap the DEMO Module file on the scroll bar.
23. Tap RECALL, then YES to the warning message.
24. Exit Designer Mode to see the effect of the changes on Module A. Module B is already locked following loading the Module file.
18.2.2.2 Summary
All data that can be stored and secured for a base configuration also can be stored and secured for Modules.
In addition, the Module can restrict access to input EQ overlays.
18.2.3 Security for Group Functions
Groups are used to connect and adjust multiple Modules. Groups cannot be locked or password-protected, but individual EQ overlays can be hidden. Global Access settings also apply to Groups. Security for levels and crossovers is not relevant for Groups.
A Group may contain various types of Modules, each with different security settings. Group levels, however, are restricted by the level limits set for the Modules within the Group. For example, if changing a Group level causes one or more Modules to exceed their minimum/maximum level limits, the action is not permitted.
18.2.3.1 Group Tutorial
To add a Group to the configuration, perform the following steps:
1. From HOME, tap GROUPS.
2. Tap GROUP 1 from the GROUPS scroll bar, and tap again in the work area.
3. Tap ASSIGN, then tap the Module A and Module B icons.
4. Tap ASSIGN again to exit the Group Assignment mode.
5. Tap EQ/LEVELS and navigate to the PEQ1 page of Group 1.
To add PEQ and hide the overlay, perform the following steps:
6. Add a parametric filter (gain: –6 dB; frequency: 125 Hz; bandwidth: 1).
7. Tap OVERLAY FUNCTIONS, then OVERLAY PROPERTIES.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
217
Designer Mode Menu Reference
8. Tap OVERLAY HIDE (illuminates orange), then tap OVLAY PROP EXIT.
When an EQ overlay is hidden, the effect its filters have on the overall EQ curve are not visible in User
Mode or when the Module is locked.
To add GEQ and set the overlay to View Only, perform the following steps:
9. Tap OVERLAY NEW. The overlay Group 1/PEQ2 is created.
10. Tap OVERLAY GEQ, then YES to the warning message.
11. Reduce the 4 kHz filter by 4 dB.
12. Tap OVERLAY PROPERTIES, then OVERLAY VIEW ONLY (illuminates orange).
To verify the effect of the changes, perform the following steps:
13. Tap HOME, then USER PREFERENCES.
14. Tap DESIGNER MODE to return to User Mode (button becomes blue).
15. Tap HOME, then tap the GROUP 1 icon and navigate to EQ.
PEQ1 is hidden, and its filter is not displayed in the EQ curve, although its effect is still audible. GEQ2 is displayed as View Only, and most functions are disabled.
18.2.3.2 Summary
Because a Group may contain various types of Modules with different security settings, Group security is limited to EQ overlays only. Crossovers are not relevant to Groups, and all security for levels is controlled via individual Modules.
18.2.4 Security for Global Access Functions
Global Access settings affect all Modules and Groups within a system configuration. To enable Global
Access mode, perform the following steps:
1. From HOME, tap USER PREFERENCES.
2. Tap DESIGNER FUNCTIONS. Ensure Designer Mode is active - orange.
3. Tap GLOBAL ACCESS.
Designer Mode Menu Reference
The options for Global Access are shown in Figure 18-6.
Figure 18-6: Global Access Options
▸ [F2] EQ HIDE hides all EQ overlays for all Modules and Groups.
▸ [F3] EQ VIEW ONLY protects all EQ overlays from adjustment for all Modules and Groups.
▸ [F4] XOVER HIDE hides all XOVER screens or HPF/LPF screens for all Modules and Groups.
▸ [F5] XOVER VIEW ONLY protects XOVER/AUX/HPF/LPF from adjustment for all Modules and Groups.
▸ [F7] LEVELS HIDE hides all LEVELS screens for all Modules and Groups.
▸ [F8] LEVELS VIEW ONLY protects all LEVELS screens from adjustment for all Modules and Groups.
18.2.4.1 Global Access Tutorial
To hide all XOVER, AUX, HPF/LPF and EQ overlays in a system, perform the following steps:
1. From HOME, tap USER PREFERENCES.
2. Tap GLOBAL ACCESS, then tap EQ Hide.
3. Tap XOVER HIDE.
4. Tap GLBL ACCESS EXIT.
5. Tap DESIGNER MODE to exit Designer Mode.
The button becomes blue (inactive/available) in User Mode.
18.2.4.2 Summary
The Global Access functions apply an overall security to a particular Controller system and can be used in addition to the system security settings.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
219
Designer Mode Menu Reference
18.3 Functional Reference Guide
This section provides an overview of the steps required for each Designer Mode process. This can be used as a quick reference for the features described throughout the tutorial based on the procedure or function.
This section describes the standard functions using the LEVELS, XOVER, and EQ screens.
Designer Mode must be active to access the functions described in this section.
18.3.1 Xover/Aux/HPF/LPF Functions
These functions apply to base configurations and Modules only. The XOVER buttons listed below could read
Aux Output or HPF/LPF depending on the Module type.
18.3.1.1 Set Individual Xover Screens to Hide/View Only
1. Navigate to the XOVER screen.
2. Tap CROSSOVER FUNCTIONS.
3. Tap CROSSOVER VIEW ONLY or CROSSOVER HIDE.
The selected status illuminates orange.
The same process applies to AUX and HPF/LPF.
18.3.1.2 Set All Xover/Aux or HPF/LPF Screens to Hide/View Only
This process will affect all XOVER/AUX/HPF/LPF screens in the current system configuration.
1. From HOME, tap USER PREFERENCES.
2. Tap GLOBAL ACCESS.
3. Tap CROSSOVER HIDE or CROSSOVER VIEW ONLY.
The selected status illuminates orange.
Designer Mode Menu Reference
18.3.1.3 All Pass Filters
In Designer Mode, the All Pass filter is available on the XOVER/AUX screens. The All Pass filter icon is
identified at [A] in Figure 18-7:
Figure 18-7: All Pass Filter
The ALL PASS filter allows first- and second-order (default) phase adjustment with variable bandwidth and frequency.
To add an ALL PASS filter to an output, perform the following steps:
1. Select an output on the Xover page, or select the required Aux Output screen.
2. Tap the ALL PASS filter icon [A].
3. Tap on the EQ scale to add the filter.
4. Adjust the order, frequency, and bandwidth as required.
18.3.2 EQ Functions
18.3.2.1 Set Hide/View Only Status for an Individual EQ Overlay
1. Navigate to the Module or Group overlay in EQ/LEVELS.
2. Tap OVERLAY FUNCTIONS, then OVERLAY PROPERTIES.
3. Tap OVERLAY VIEW ONLY or OVERLAY HIDE. The selected status is illuminated orange.
18.3.2.2 Set Hide/View Only Status for All EQ Overlays
This affects all EQ overlays in the current system configuration.
1. From HOME, tap USER PREFERENCES.
2. Tap GLOBAL ACCESS.
3. Tap EQ HIDE/EQ VIEW ONLY.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
221
Designer Mode Menu Reference
18.3.3 Levels Functions
18.3.3.1 Adjust Factory Levels
A button labeled ADJUST FACTORY is available on the METER OPTIONS menu from the LEVELS page of a Module. When this button is active (orange), a label reading ADJUST FACTORY appears at the top of each
Levels page to confirm this special mode of operation. Factory levels are not applicable for Groups.
In this mode, a different set of factory levels are displayed for each level type. These are displayed using the same faders and meters used for the adjustment of user levels; the fader positions and gain values change to indicate the factory level instead of the user level.
The sum of factory, user, and Group levels are combined to provide the actual total. Factory levels are not included in the total level value that is shown in brackets in User Mode.
Adjust Factory values are available for all level types with the exception of MaxRMS Corner,
MaxRMS Attack and MaxRMS Release.
To set factory levels, perform the following steps:
1. From the LEVELS page, tap METER OPTIONS, then ADJUST FACTORY.
2. Tap METER OPTS EXIT, and navigate to the relevant LEVELS page.
3. Enter the values required using the fader or keyboard entry.
4. Tap METER OPTIONS, then ADJUST FACTORY to exit this mode
Factory levels can be hidden from the end user by locking the Module or exiting Designer Mode.
18.3.3.2 Restrict Level Adjustments
Level Limits are used to restrict minimum and maximum levels for a Module. Although a Group’s Level
Limits cannot be set, they adhere to the limits of all Modules that are assigned to it. For example, if changing a Group level causes any of its Modules to exceed their allowable range, the action is not permitted.
1. Navigate to Module Levels, tap METER OPTIONS, then tap LEVEL LIMITS.
2. Tap GAIN/DELAY LIMITS or LIMITERMAX LIMITS.
3. Tap the relevant minimum/maximum level. Each channel is displayed in the same order as the channel faders (from left to right: Input, Output 1, Output 2, and so on).
Designer Mode Menu Reference
4. Enter the limit, and tap OK.
Figure 18-8: Restricting the Minimum Gain Value for Output 1
18.3.3.3 Disable Level Adjustments
If the minimum and maximum level limits are identical for a particular channel and level type, that control is effectively disabled. The fader for the associated channel and level type is not visible in User Mode or when the Module is locked.
Set both the minimum and maximum values of a particular level output and level type to the same value. To verify that the fader has been removed and the level fixed, either lock the Module or base configuration or switch to User Mode.
18.3.3.4 Disable Access to a Levels Function
To disable access to an entire level function (delay, for example), set identical minimum and maximum delay level limits for every channel for the Module. Set the minimum and maximum values of all inputs/outputs for a particular level type to the same value.
Figure 18-9: Disabling an Entire Levels Function
DELAY button on the EQ/LEVELS menu in User Mode, or when the Module or base configuration is locked.
Figure 18-10: Access to the Delay Function is Disabled
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
223
Designer Mode Menu Reference
18.3.3.5 Disable/Enable Unused Output Channels
To completely hide a levels meter/fader, set the name of fader to Unused, perform the following steps:
1. Navigate to the relevant Module LEVELS page.
2. Tap LABEL CHANNEL, then tap the mute/label button of the relevant channel.
3. Type UNUSED, and tap OK.
The meter and fader will be invisible on the software Controller, and the meter is also disabled on the front panel of the Lake device. To enable the channel again, change the channel label to something other than
UNUSED.
18.3.3.6 Set Hide/View Only Status for All Levels Screens
This function affects all Levels screens in the current system configuration.
1. From HOME, tap USER PREFERENCES.
2. Tap GLOBAL ACCESS, then tap LEVELS HIDE or LEVELS VIEW ONLY.
The selected button is illuminated orange.
18.3.4 Additional Designer Mode Functions
18.3.4.1 Switch between Designer Mode and User Mode
To access Designer Mode, perform the following steps:
1. From HOME, tap USER PREFERENCES, then tap DESIGNER MODE.
2. Enter the password (if set), and tap OK.
To switch to User Mode, perform the following steps:
1. From HOME, tap USER PREFERENCES.
The Designer Mode button is orange when Designer Mode is active.
2. Tap DESIGNER MODE.
The Designer Mode button is now blue; Designer Mode is inactive.
Designer Mode Menu Reference
18.3.4.2 Lock and Password-Protect a Module or Base Configuration
Locking a Module or base configuration enables access security (such as hiding EQ overlays, setting XOVER screens to View Only, and disabling level functions). The LABEL & LOCK function activates security in both
User Mode and Designer Mode, allowing certain settings to be protected from other system designers.
From the Modules menu, tap a Module icon to select it.
1. Tap LABEL & LOCK.
2. Tap SET MOD PASSWORD (for Module) or SET BASE PASSWORD (for base Module).
3. Enter a password, and tap OK.
4. Confirm password, tap OK, then tap OK to the warning message.
5. Tap MODULE UNLOCKED or BASE UNLOCKED to lock the relevant settings.
18.3.4.3 Unlock a Locked Module or Base Configuration
From the MODULES menu, tap a Module icon to select it.
1. Tap LABEL & LOCK.
2. Tap UNLOCK MODULE or UNLOCK BASE.
3. Enter the associated password, and tap OK.
18.3.4.4 Creating Descriptions/Assigning Graphics for Module Files
Text files (.txt) and bitmap files (.bmp) with the same file name as a Module file can be placed in the data/ user/Modules directory of your Lake Controller installation.
When a text file is present with the same file name, the Controller displays the text when the Module file is selected on the MODULE STORE/RECALL scroll bar. When a bitmap file is present, the graphic is displayed in place of the default Module icon.
Bitmap files must be 24-bit Microsoft Windows format with a dimension of 80×80 pixels. MODULE
LABEL text will overwrite the bottom portion of the bitmap.
Follow these steps to create and view Module file descriptions:
1. Store a Module with the file name ’example’ at the Modules root directory.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
225
Designer Mode Menu Reference
2. Minimize the Controller and, using a text editor (such as Microsoft Notepad), create a text (.txt) file containing the text you require.
3. Store this text file in your Lake Controller installation directory e.g. C:\Program Files\Lake\Lake Controller vX.X\data\user\Modules\Modules.txt
In Windows 7 these files are created in the virtual store; please use the [User Data files] shortcut from the Start > All Programs menu for easy access to these files.
Figure 18-11: Storing a Module Help Text File
4. Maximize the Lake Controller and navigate to MODULE STORE/RECALL.
5. Select the Module file example from the scroll bar.
The text you entered appears above the Module as shown in Figure 18-12.
Figure 18-12: Module Help Text
Designer Mode Menu Reference
Module descriptions can be modified by editing the text file, or removed by deleting the text file. A shortcut to the data/user folder is available at:
START > PROGRAMS > LAKE CONTROLLER > LAKE CONTROLLER USER DATA FILES.
Folder descriptions can also be created by placing a text file with the same name as the folder in the same directory as the folder.
18.4 Designer Worksheets
18.4.1 Overview
The Designer Worksheets provide the ability to quickly view and edit the majority of data for a Lake device via a spreadsheet style interface.
Designer worksheets are available only in Designer Mode, via the I/O CONFIG & Worksheets button.
To access the Designer Worksheets, perform the following steps:
1. From HOME, tap MODULES.
2. Select a Module in the work area.
3. Tap I/O CONFIG & WORKSHEETS.
The following screen tabs are available for loudspeaker Modules in Designer Mode.
Figure 18-13: Designer Worksheets for Contour Modules
The following screen tabs are available for Mesa EQ Modules in Designer Mode.
Figure 18-14: Designer Worksheets for Mesa EQ Modules
4. Tap LEVELS - DESIGN.
A screen similar to that shown below will be displayed.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
227
Designer Mode Menu Reference
Figure 18-15: Levels-Design Worksheet
18.4.2 Worksheet Navigation and Data Entry
To navigate to the worksheets, select one of the Design tabs at the top of the screen.
18.4.2.1 External Keyboard Entry
For fast data entry via the Designer Worksheet, an external keyboard should be attached. Use the arrow keys to navigate around the cells of the worksheet, and enter values and data using the keyboard. The data of the current cell will be verified and updated when you move to the next cell.
Cut/Copy/Paste functionality between cells in the worksheet is available using the following standard keyboard shortcuts.
▸
Ctrl+X Cut
▸
Ctrl+C Copy
▸
Ctrl+V Paste
Designer Mode Menu Reference
18.4.2.2 On-screen Keyboard Entry
If a keyboard is not attached, you may select a cell using the touch screen:
▸
A single tap selects the cell.
▸
A double tap displays the on-screen keyboard to allow you to enter the data.
Cell Cut/Copy/Paste functionality is not available without an external keyboard attached.
18.4.3 Xover/Aux: Design (Loudspeaker Modules Only)
The XOVER/AUX screens provide access to HPF and LPF frequencies and types (including crossovers) along with output EQ filters and types. The abbreviated codes for this data are listed here with descriptions.
18.4.3.1 HPF and LPF Types
The same HPF/LPF/Crossover types are allowed via data entry as are allowed via the HPF/LPF/Crossover scroll bars on the XOVER page. The following HPF/LPF types are available for the lowest output HPF and highest output LPF.
BESSEL
BE6
BE12
BE18
BE24
BUTTERWORTH
BU6
BU12
BU18
BU24
Table 18-2: HPF/LPF Types
LINKWITZ-RILEY
-
LR12
-
LR24
18.4.3.2 Classic Crossover Types
The following HPF/LPF types are allowed for crossover points only (all HPF/LPF fields except for the HPF on the lowest output channel, and the LPF on the highest output channel for the Module).
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
229
Designer Mode Menu Reference
BESSEL
BE6
BE12
BE18
BE24
BE30
BE36
BE42
BE48
BUTTERWORTH
BU6
BU12
BU18
BU24
BU30
BU36
BU42
BU48
Table 18-3: Classic Crossover Types
LINKWITZ-RILEY
-
LR12
-
LR24
-
LR36
-
LR48
18.4.3.3 Linear Phase Crossover Types
The following HPF/LPF types are allowed for Linear Phase 2-Way and 3-Way Module crossover points only
(i.e. not the HPF on the lowest output channel or the LPF on the highest output channel for the Module).
LINEAR PHASE
24 dB
LP24
LINEAR PHASE
48 dB
LP48
Table 18-4: Linear Phase Crossover Types
LINEAR PHASE
BRICK WALL
LPBW
Linear phase crossovers require both sides of the crossover point to be the same crossover type.
Therefore if the one side of the crossover is changed, the other side will change automatically.
18.4.3.4 Linear Phase Alignment Delay
Unlike most values in the worksheet, ALIGNMENT DELAY is a Module-based value, not a channel-based value. Therefore, when ALIGNMENT DELAY is changed for any channel, all other channels of that Module will be updated automatically.
Linear Phase 2-Way and 3-Way Modules provide six settings: 1.25 ms, 2.5 ms, 5 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms.
Linear Phase Brick Wall 4-Way Modules provide four settings: 3.15 ms, 6.29 ms, 12.58 ms, 25.17 ms.
18.4.3.5 Output EQ Types
with associated default values.
Designer Mode Menu Reference
EQ TYPE
LS
BP
AP
HS
DESCRIPTION
Low Shelf
Band-pass
(Parametric)
All Pass
GAIN
0 dB
0 dB
2nd
Order
FREQUENCY
125 Hz
500 Hz
800 Hz
High Shelf 0 dB
Table 18-5: Output EQ Types
8 kHz
BANDWIDTH
1.9
0.33
0.33
1.9
18.4.4 HPF/LPF - Design (Mesa EQ Only)
Crossovers, EQ, and All Pass filters are not available on the Mesa EQ HPF/LPF - DESIGN screen. The same
HPF/LPF types are available for Mesa EQ as listed in Table 18-2.
18.4.5 Levels - Design
The data on the LEVELS - DESIGN worksheet is entered by typing the appropriate numerical value into a cell on the worksheet. An error message will be displayed if the value is invalid or incorrect.
To set polarity through the LEVELS - DESIGN worksheet, enter either + (positive) or – (negative) in the polarity field. The polarity of each output can be independently locked using the LOCK POLARITY? field, which is only available via this worksheet.
To lock polarity of an output, change the value in the associated LOCK POLARITY? field to Y. The example
Figure 18-16: Locking Polarity
When the Module is locked, the worksheet will appear as shown Figure 18-17. In this example, output
polarity for channels 2, 3, and 4 will be locked even in Designer Mode.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
231
Designer Mode Menu Reference
Figure 18-17: Polarity Locked
input and low output polarity buttons will be visible.
18.4.6 PEQ - Design
18-6 shows the available PEQ type abbreviations, descriptions, and default values.
EQ TYPE
LS
BP
ME
HS
DESCRIPTION GAIN FREQUENCY
Low Shelf
Band-pass
(Parametric)
Mesa Filter
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
125 Hz
500 Hz
830 Hz
1.2 kHz
High Shelf 0 dB
Table 18-6: PEQ Types
8 kHz
BANDWIDTH
1.9
0.33
0.33
0.33
1.9
The extra fields for the Mesa filter can only be edited when a Mesa filter type is entered.
18.4.7 GEQ - Design
The GEQ-DESIGN worksheet displays the details for each GEQ overlay for the selected Lake device, including the gain value of each GEQ filter and the bypassed/inserted status of each filter and each overlay.
18.4.8 Locked Modules/Hidden/View Only Data
If data on a Module has been hidden or set to view only, and the Module has been locked, the associated data will either be view only on the worksheets (View Only data) or will be replaced with the word
LOCKED (Hidden data).
PLM Series Reference and Operation
19. PLM Series Reference and Operation
This chapter describes information specific using the Lake Controller with PLM Series devices. For further details on the use of PLM Series products, please refer to the PLM Series Operation Manual.
19.1 Monitoring & Control
Many of the PLM’s basic operating parameters are available in both the Lake Controller software and the
PLM front panel. These include, for example, gain adjustment, monitoring of output levels and temperatures, and power control.
Basic per-channel operating parameters and gain adjustments are presented in the Status tab, with certain adjustments and power control accessed via the Control tab. The History and Events tabs provide both real-time log data and a graphical representation of the PLM’s performance.
19.2 LoadLibrary™
In addition to the standard loudspeaker preset Module files, the Lake Controller includes a set of enhanced files specifically for use with the PLM Series.
Termed the LoadLibrary
™
, these supplementary PLM Module files incorporate both standard Lake DSP parameters along with data relating specifically to the PLM. LoadLibrary Module files provide parameter settings for the PLM’s Amplifier Gain and ISVPL
™
limiter. Additionally, LoadLibrary loudspeaker types may include electrical characteristics data for the associated loudspeaker.
The data set relating to the loudspeaker’s electrical characteristics is used to enable load verification
(LoadSmart
™
) and monitoring facilities (SpeakerSafe
™
) to be performed on the PLM. This data set is termed a Fingerprint. When a PLM-specific loudspeaker type is recalled, its Fingerprint load characteristics are included. These load characteristics are stored in a file with a “.mdl” suffix and are recalled simultaneously with the Module file.
LoadLibrary Modules and standard Module files are cross-compatible; when a LoadLibrary Module is recalled into a legacy Lake product the extra data is ignored.
19.3 LoadSmart™
LoadSmart is Lab.gruppen’s exclusive system for verifying the load connected to each output channel of the PLM. LoadSmart is set up and run from the Load tab. The number of each type of cabinet that should be connected to each power channel can be specified, along with cable lengths, resistance, etc. LoadSmart evaluates the load characteristics on each PLM power output channel and either confirms them as correct or reports if they are exhibiting anomalies.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
233
PLM Series Reference and Operation
LoadSmart is available when a Module with an associated Fingerprint file is loaded - please refer to section
19.4 SpeakerSafe™
SpeakerSafe, accessed from the Load tab, is an exclusive Lab.gruppen real-time performance monitoring and logging feature.
SpeakerSafe constantly monitors the characteristics of the load connected to each PLM output while audio is running. Operation is initiated from the Load tab following a successful LoadSmart verification.
The loudspeaker Fingerprint is again used to calculate operating parameters such as loudspeaker magnet and voice coil temperatures. Numerical and graphic displays, along with warning alerts (when warranted), allow the operator to detect any excessive or anomalous conditions before serious problems can develop.
19.5 Navigation
The EVENTS & CONTROL functionality, when used with PLM Series units, provides additional modulelevel information including STATUS, HISTORY and LOAD information. PLM MODULE VIEW and
PLM GLOBAL VIEW. Each has further tabbed views.
Figure 19-1: PLM Module View Tabs
19.5.1 Accessing PLM Module View
PLM Module View can be accessed by three different methods.
1. Tap HOME [F1] then tap a Module icon. Ensure LEVELS is selected, then tap EVENTS & CONTROL
(located below the first output fader).
2. Tap HOME [F1] then tap MODULES [F3]. Select a Module, tap I/O CONFIG [F4] then tap
EVENTS & CONTROL [F7].
3. Tap HOME [F1] then tap the ALL page tab. Tap a PLM icon to directly access EVENTS & CONTROL.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
19.5.2 Accessing Global View
To access Global View:
1. Navigate to the ALL page
2. Tap GLOBAL INFO [F9]
3. Tap EVENTS & CONTROL [F8]
Figure 19-2: Global View Tabs
19.6 Status Tab
The STATUS display is selected by tapping the STATUS tab in PLM MODULE VIEW.
Channel strips display data relating to each power output section assigned to the selected Module.
The channels are presented in Module output order (e.g. low, mid, high). If a Module output is assigned to more that one power output channel then this is displayed accordingly (e.g. low, low, mid, high).
The PLM’s meters are reproduced as vertical bar graphs. Each channel strip provides an attenuation fader, phase reverse button, and mute button. Additional identity and status information concerning the output channel and connected loads is shown below in two data blocks. To the right of the channel strips, a column of control buttons provide options for displaying and enabling the mute and polarity buttons on individual channels.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
235
PLM Series Reference and Operation
Figure 19-3: Status Tab Speaker and Power Output Channel Status
19.6.1 Attenuation
1
The virtual fader permits adjustment of the channel’s attenuation, from 0 dB (fader fully open) to - ∞dB
(fader closed). Moving this fader has the same effect as adjusting attenuation on the PLM front panel in
Menu Mode, via MENU > ATTENUATION.
The attenuation value may also be set by tapping the numeric display at the top of the fader. A numeric keypad opens allowing an absolute value to be entered.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
19.6.2 Mute
2
The large mute button below the meter display activates the mute function for the power output channel.
The button changes color to red when the mute is applied, and the legend changes from UNMUTED to
MUTE. Tapping this button is equivalent to pressing soft buttons 5 – 8 on the PLM’s front panel in METER mode, with MUTE ENABLE selected.
19.6.3 Phase Reverse
3
A phase reverse button is provided which inverts the audio signal within the channel power output stage.
The button is blue and normally shows the legend + Φ ; when applied it turns red and shows Φ . Note that this is an additional phase reversal at a later stage in the signal chain from the Lake Processing Modules, and does not have an equivalent control in either the PLM’s Menu system or elsewhere in the Lake Controller software.
19.6.4 Meters
4
Four vertical bar graph meters are depicted for each channel. These display output voltage (V), current (I) and power (P), along with the amount of gain reduction applied by combined action of the various limiters and protection circuitry (L). The meters correspond to the four bar graph meters on the PLM front panel display in METER MODE, MODULE VIEW. Clip indicators for, respectively, voltage and current are located directly above the voltage and current meter. Clip behavior is shown by a red light, using a fast update rate to correctly indicate ballistics.
Two numerical displays are above the meter block. The top display switches mode dynamically to show the parameter closest to clipping at the moment: voltage (V), current (I) or power (P). The bottom display shows the current value of the Limiter meter.
19.6.5 Speaker Data Block
5
The display block below the meter section provides user feedback about the loudspeaker connected to each
PLM power output channel.
▸
SPEAKER - The name shown here corresponds to that of the Module outputs and usually describes the frequency band (e.g. Low, Mid, High) that a particular power output channel addresses.
For Modules with two or more identical output channel names, the channel number will be appended.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
237
PLM Series Reference and Operation
▸
STATUS - OK is displayed when all load detection and monitoring functions report that the load attached to the power output channel is normal. If output conditions are such that a fault or warning state arises, a message will be displayed here advising the nature of the problem. Please refer to the PLM Series
Operation Manual for a list of fault/warning messages.
▸ CABINETS - During SpeakerSafe monitoring, the software application calculates the number of speaker cabinets of the selected type which appear to be connected to the channel output. The result is displayed here.
▸ TVC
-
This indicates the calculated loudspeaker voice coil temperature, derived from channel output power measurement and Fingerprint data.
▸
TMAG This shows the calculated loudspeaker magnet temperature, derived and displayed in the same way.
▸ TSPK - Whichever of TVC or TMAG is closer to the maximum temperature allowed is also displayed on a horizontal bar graph.
19.6.6 PLM Power Output Data Block
6
The bottom display block provides user feedback about the performance of the PLM. The information is
(from top):
▸
AMPLIFIER - Confirms PLM Frame label and channel number. This name also displays in Frame block, line 2, on the PLM front panel display. The channel number corresponds to the power output channel.
The Frame name and number are separated by a colon.
▸
STATUS - OK is displayed during normal operation, when no faults, warnings or clipping is occurring. If an amplifier-related fault or warning state arises, a message is displayed here indicating the problem.
▸ TPSU - Provides the temperature of the PLM power supply. The temperature is expressed as a percentage of the maximum safe value.
▸
TCH - Provides the temperature of the particular PLM channel’s output stage, displayed as a percentage of the maximum safe value.
▸ TAMP - Whichever of TPSU or TCH is closer to the maximum temperature allowed is also displayed on a horizontal bar graph.
The Tpsu, Tvc, Tmag and Tch displays correspond to temperature meters provided on the PLM Front
Panel METER MODE > TEMPERATURE VIEW.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
19.6.7 Mute and Polarity Enable
Controls to the right of the channel strips enable and disable the MUTE and POLARITY functions on a global basis. When MUTE is enabled (default), the mute buttons are active. When MUTE is disabled, the mute status cannot be changed.
Polarity control allows three states:
▸
HIDDEN (default) removes the polarity buttons from the channel strips.
▸
VISIBLE displays the polarity buttons but they are disabled.
▸
ENABLED activates the buttons and allows a change of state.
The Mute and Polarity enable controls are global for all Modules currently in the work area. Controls are reset to defaults at the start of each new session.
19.7 History Tab
A log of various optional parameters is maintained within the PLM. Samples are taken every two minutes.
The last 120 samples (i.e. the last 4 hours of operation) may be viewed graphically on the HISTORY tab.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
239
PLM Series Reference and Operation
Figure 19-4: Module History Tab
19.7.1 Select Curve
The HISTORY tab displays a graph of several PLM operational parameters against time. The vertical (Y-) axis is in arbitrary units and is scaled from 0 to 100%; the horizontal (X-) axis is effectively ‘time’, but actually shows the previous 120 samples taken at 2 minute intervals.
The parameter to be displayed is selected by tapping on one of the buttons in the SELECT CURVE box below the graph. The options are:
▸
COMBINED HEADROOM – This curve is constructed from all the individual parameters listed below, and shows the maximum value derived from all of them at each sample time.
▸ FRAME PSU TEMP – Displays the temperature of the PLM PSU relative to its maximum safe level.
▸ AMP CHANNEL TEMP – Displays the temperature of the PLM power output channel devices relative to their maximum safe level.
▸
SPEAKER MAGNET TEMP – Displays the SpeakerSafe computed temperature of the loudspeaker magnet/s for each channel.
▸ SPEAKER VOICE COIL TEMP – Displays the SpeakerSafe computed temperature of the loudspeaker voice coil/s for each channel.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
▸
AMP OUTPUT CURRENT – Displays the PLM channel’s output current relative to its maximum safe value. (This is the value at which the CPL becomes active.)
▸ AMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE – Displays the power output channel’s voltage relative to the voltage permissible, regardless of ISVPL setting.
▸
TOTAL OUTPUT POWER – Displays the total output power (sum of all channels in that Frame) relative to the maximum rated power.
▸ AMP OUTPUT POWER – Displays the power output channel’s power relative to the maximum rated power.
▸
MAINS CURRENT – (PLM 20000Q Only) Displays the mains current as a percentage of the maximum current.
▸ MAINS VOLTAGE – (PLM 20000Q Only) Displays the mains voltage as an actual value in volts.
19.7.2 Select Dimension
The MIN, PEAK and AVERAGE buttons in the SELECT DIMENSION box determine whether the data displayed on the graph is the log of minimum, peak or average values for the displayed parameter.
MIN is only active for the Mains Voltage parameter, and displays the minimum Mains Voltage levels at intervals during the sample period (PLM 20000Q only).
PEAK displays the highest values attained by each parameter during the sample period.
AVERAGE displays the average of the values measured during the sample period.
19.7.3 Channels
The graph displays data for any selected power output channel assigned to the selected Module, or any combination of channels. The number of channel buttons that appear under SELECT CHANNEL/S depends on the Module configuration. The channel buttons display the associated Module channel labels; the curves on the graph are color coded, with a key color shown below each channel button.
The SELECT/DESELECT ALL button toggles states to either select or deselect all channels on the selected
Module.
With a single channel selected, clicking the graph will display the time and sample number for that sample on the status line.
A white dot is displayed on the graphs if a powercycle of the Frame was performed during the sampling period.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
241
PLM Series Reference and Operation
19.8 Events Tab
channels allocated to the selected Module.
The EVENT LOG displayed on this screen is the same as that displayed via GLOBAL EVENTS with filters applied to only display events relevant to the currently selected Module, power output channels assigned to that Module, and the Frame/s incorporating those channels. The tab is identical in format and function to the
GLOBAL EVENTS tab. Please refer to section 19.11 for further details.
Figure 19-5: Module Events Tab
19.9 Load Tab
The Load page is selected by tapping the LOAD tab in Module view. LoadSmart loudspeaker verification is initiated from this tab. LoadSmart generates a test signal which is applied to the power output stage.
Measurements are taken at the power output stage, and the results computed for the speaker type, using data from the LoadLibrary.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
The LOAD tab is disabled if fingerprint data is not present, and also when the PLM is in Standby mode.
The Load tab allows editing of default cable data in the Fingerprint, including cable characteristics that are used in the calculation of the total cable resistance for each loudspeaker. The Lake Controller application combines this information with the known loudspeaker characteristics contained in the fingerprint to accurately verify the load and to confirm correct loudspeaker system operation.
Figure 19-6: Load Tab and LoadSmart Verification
19.9.1 Number of Cabinets
The number of loudspeaker cabinets connected in parallel to each channel is entered in the No. of Cabinets in Parallel field. LoadSmart uses this value for verification purposes. This data may also be entered via the
PLM front panel. Please refer to the PLM Series Operation Manual for further information.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
243
PLM Series Reference and Operation
19.9.2 Cable Resistance
The Cable Resistance field presents the total cable resistance that is configured for each power output channel. The fingerprint contains a default cable type that is recalled with the file. Tapping the
CABLE RESISTANCE field opens the Cable Resistance Calculator where the individual cable parameters can be viewed and edited.
Changes made on the Cable Resistance Calculator are reflected in the Cable Resistance field.
19.9.2.1 Calculator
The Cable Resistance Calculator provides input fields for cable length, cable gauge, contact resistance and cable resistivity. The entered data fields give a calculated result for the total loudspeaker cable resistance in ohms. This value is reflected in the TOTAL CABLE RESISTANCE field for the selected power output channel in the upper table. The values for a specific cable’s properties (resistivity, gauge, etc.) can be obtained from the cable manufacturer’s data sheets.
19.9.2.2 Ambient Temperature
The load verification and monitoring system takes ambient temperature into account when checking the performance of the load. The ambient temperature for the system is entered in the GLOBAL CONTROL tab,
accessed from the ALL view. Please refer to section 19.9 for further details.
The TEMPERATURE setting also affects the temperature presentation in LOAD RESULTS and
STATUS.
19.9.3 Fingerprint Label
This field presents the label of a particular fingerprint as it was set when the fingerprint was created.
19.9.4 Verify
After all required cable data is entered, tap VERIFY to initiate LoadSmart verification. Tap YES to confirm.
Load verification commences for all PLM power output channels assigned to the selected Module. The channels are muted and a sequenced sweep is issued. After the verification procedure has been conducted, the LOAD RESULTS window appears.
Simultaneous load verification of all PLMs on the network can be initiated from the GLOBAL CONTROL tab.
LoadSmart verification can be initiated from the
PLM front panel, with a reduced set of results displayed on the front-panel LCD. Refer to the PLM
Series Operation Manual for further information.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
Figure 19-7: Load Verification Results
19.9.5 Settings
The set of buttons at the foot of the page allow the user to select the most convenient measurement units for the load verification system and cable resistance calculation. The options are:
▸ TEMPERATURE – °C or °F
▸ CABLE LENGTH – Meters or Feet
▸ CABLE GAUGE – AWG numbers or as mm2 cross-section
19.9.6 LoadSmart Results
LOAD RESULTS reports the findings of the verification procedure and contains the function controls for
SpeakerSafe. Results for each PLM power output is displayed together with a summary in the ALL column.
19.9.6.1 Load Type Verification
The results shown in the Load type row of the table will be one of the following:
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
245
PLM Series Reference and Operation
▸
CORRECT – The measured load characteristics closely match the values predicted from the load library data in combination with the total resistance calculation.
▸ UNCERTAIN – The measured load characteristics exhibit a degree of variance from the predicted values. A warning becomes active on the channel.
▸
WRONG – The measured characteristics differ widely from the predicted values; it is assumed that the load has malfunctioned or is of the wrong type. A fault is issued and the channel remains muted. A successful re-verification, power cycle, or placing the PLM into standby mode, will clear the fault and the mute state.
▸ NO MODEL – Fingerprint data is missing from the Module file selected.
▸ ABORTED – A power output channel was in a protective state during the load verification process (e.g. temperature fault).
The ALL column summarizes the NUMBER OF
CABINETS verification result from each power output channel in the order VERIFIED > WRONG. e.g. 2/1 = two channels match, one does not.
If LOAD TYPE VERIFICATION fails, the power output channel will be muted to prevent speaker damage. A subsequent CORRECT or UNCERTAIN verification (or power cycle) resolves the mute.
19.9.6.2 Cabinet Count Verification
The results in the NUMBER OF CABINETS row will be one of the following:
▸
VERIFIED – The measured load impedance indicates the number of cabinets connected to this power output matches that configured.
▸ WRONG – The measured load impedance indicates either that the number of cabinets connected to this power output channel is incorrect.
If the correct number of cabinets is entered but the results returned are wrong it is possible to force settings through for SpeakerSafe to monitor by selecting FORCE TO CONFIGURED.
19.9.6.3 Voice Coil Temperature
The VOICE COIL TEMPERATURE row indicates the estimated loudspeaker voice coil temperature from the
LoadSmart test results. This is calculated from the LoadSmart verification results and Fingerprint data.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
The ALL column summarizes temperatures in the order Min/Average/Max. e.g. 20/23/25 = voice coil temperatures in range 20° C to 25° C, with an average value of 23° C.
19.9.6.4 SpeakerSafe Starting Temperature
There are two options for selecting the starting voice coil temperature for SpeakerSafe operation. The first option is to accept the measured temperature. The second option is to set a specific temperature. The selection is made with via the soft buttons to the left of the display.
The range of voice coil temperatures from minimum to maximum is displayed to the right of the
ACCEPT MEASURED TEMPERATURES button. Thus, in this example,
20-25
would be displayed. If the range is acceptable and the ACCEPT MEASURED TEMPERATURES button is selected when SpeakerSafe is started, these results will be the starting values for SpeakerSafe monitoring.
ACCEPT MEASURED TEMPERATURES is the default condition for this button. Temperatures will be used unless modified as explained below.
If one or more anomalous results is suspected a starting temperature for SpeakerSafe monitoring may be entered manually.
Tapping the left-hand button in the SET TEMPERATURES box sets the temperature currently displayed in the right-hand button. Tapping this button opens a numeric keypad allowing a temperature value to be entered. A SpeakerSafe starting temperature entered manually in this way effectively cancels out any errors and the entered values will be stored in the PLM for the next verification.
19.9.6.5 Start SpeakerSafe
Following acceptance of the calculated voice coil temperatures from the LoadSmart verification
(or manual entry of a value), SpeakerSafe performance monitoring may be initiated. Press the
START SPEAKERSAFE button. The status of the load on each power output channel will now be monitored continuously, and the results displayed on the STATUS and HISTORY tabs of the Lake Controller, and also on the corresponding front panel screen/s of the PLM/s.
Note that SpeakerSafe will not run if a WRONG result was obtained in LoadSmart verification for any of the PLM channels. The problem leading to the WRONG result must be resolved before SpeakerSafe live monitoring can be run.
If SpeakerSafe is not started, a warning message will be generated. The SPEAKERSAFE NOT STARTED warning will be displayed in the EVENT LOG, and the message SPKSAFE INACT warning will be displayed on the PLM front panel and in the Lake Controller software.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
247
PLM Series Reference and Operation
19.9.6.6 Re-verify
If there is a reason to doubt the test results, or an obvious reason for an unacceptable result (e.g. a cabinet not plugged in), the load verification can be re-run by tapping RE-VERIFY.
19.10 Control Tab
The Module control page is selected by tapping the CONTROL tab in Module view.
The Control tab displays data contained in the Module output channel, and not the power channels. It is important to remember that AMPLIFIER GAIN and ISVPL data are stored within each Module alongside other Lake Module data. Appropriate AMPLIFIER GAIN and ISVPL data are transferred to the respective power output channel/s when they are routed to the Module outputs.
19.10.1 Power Control
POWER ON and STANDBY buttons are provided on the Control tab. These buttons can control the PLM
Frame (or multiple Frames in a Super Module configuration) containing any power output channels assigned to the Module, allowing the Frame/s to be set in Standby mode. A system-wide power control facility is
available from the Control tab in Global View. Please refer to section 19.9 for further details.
Figure 19-8: Control Tab with Parameters and Power Control
19.10.2 Amplifier Gain
The amplifier gain parameter on the Control tab relates to the power output stage of the amplifier.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
To change the amplifier gain for a channel, tap on the associated cell and enter a value via the pop-up numeric keypad. Entering a value in the ALL cell applies that value to all power output channels.
Amplifier gain may also be set via the PLM front panel via MENU > MODULE > AMP GAIN.
19.10.3 Inter-Sample Voltage Peak Limiter (ISVPL) Threshold
The ISVPL threshold is displayed in the second row of the Control tab table.
Blue text indicates the configured value; white text within block parenthesis indicates the actual value. The actual value can be limited by the maximum voltage a particular PLM Series model can produce.
The maximium upper limit is 600 V, but is capped at the maximium allowed channel voltage for the PLM model; in Bridge mode, double the normal maximium channel voltage is allowed. Please refer to the
PLM Series Operation Manual for additional information.
Module settings are cross compatible between models and the ISVPL threshold can be set to the voltage that a speaker may require. If the Module is recalled or copied to a PLM with a lower output voltage capability than the configured value, the actual value will be limited accordingly. When using a PLM Series model with lower output voltage, a higher configured value can still be adjusted and stored.
These values correspond to the ISVPL settings adjusted on the PLM front panel via
MENU >
MODULE
>
LIMITERS > ISVPL . Threshold values may be adjusted on the front panel interface or on screen in the same manner as above.
AMPLIFIER GAIN and ISVPL are subject to limits set by the system designer. If you are unable to change a
19.10.4 ISVPL Profile
The ISVPL profile controls attack and release times of the ISVPL limiter along with the associated voltage
clip behavior. There are six options available as shown and described in Figure 19-9.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
249
PLM Series Reference and Operation
Figure 19-9: ISVPL Profile Options
19.10.5 Amplifier Clip Level
The Amplifier Clip level is calculated from Amplifier Gain and ISVPL values. This figure represents the digital signal level from the Module output that will produce clipping or limiting at the power output channel. If no
EQ or additional gain is applied in the Lake Processing Module, this figure also represents the digital input level at which clipping or limiting will be produced at the power output channel.
The ALL column parameter displays if all values for the parameter type are identical.
19.10.6 Amplifier Gain and ISVPL Level Limits
Designer Mode allows a system designer to set level limits for Amplifier Gain and ISVPL, and hide these parameters. This function is accessed from a button visible only in Designer Mode when both the Module and base configuration file are unlocked.
The LEVEL LIMITS button, located in the bottom right hand corner opens a new window where minimum and maximum levels can be set.
Level limits are stored as factory levels when a base configuration file is stored. Users loading a Module file employing this base configuration can only adjust parameters within the allowed range. If the maximum and minimum values are identical, the value is locked and hidden from view. For more information on Designer
Mode, please refer to chapter 18.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
19.11 Global Events Tab
The GLOBAL EVENTS tab provides an EVENT LOG listing warnings, faults, and user actions that have occurred in all devices on the network since the Lake Controller software was started. In addition, it contains events that can be read from each PLM’s internal log covering four hours prior to starting the
Lake Controller. Various filter options are available for displaying a user-definable subset of the log.
The data set for the most recent event is repeated in the separate horizontal pane at the bottom of the table.
Figure 19-10: Global Events Logging Tab
19.11.1 Log Entries
Seven items of information per event are displayed in the log in tabular form, as follows:
▸ EVENT – Displays system faults or warning notifications. Icons shown below reference the source of the notification. Icons change color, from yellow (warning) to red (fault) to indicate severity.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
251
PLM Series Reference and Operation
Speaker: Warning
Speaker: Fault
Amplifier: Warning
Amplifier: Fault
User Event
Figure 19-11: Events Tab Warning Icon Descriptions
▸ START TIME – Displays the system time and date at which the event occurred
▸ DURATION – Displays ACTIVE while the fault/warning is active. Once the fault/warning becomes inactive, the duration for which it was active is displayed. Once the event is cleared, its line of text in the log changes color from white to gray.
▸ FRAME – Identifies the PLM Frame in which the fault/warning/event occurred by displaying the Frame label. If a Frame label has not been allocated, this field displays the default model name i.e. 10000Q.
▸
MODULE – Displays the name of the Module in which the event occurred. This will be the default name (i.e. 3way, 2aux, etc.) if the Module has not been renamed.
▸ CHANNEL – Indicates the channel on which the event occurred. This column will be blank if the event was a Frame event – e.g. network failure, etc.
▸
DESCRIPTION – Displays a description of the event. A full list of the possible warning messages can be found in the PLM Series Operation Manual.
19.11.2 Sorting Options
The default list order for the data displayed in the event log is chronological, with the most recent event at the bottom of the list. To sort the data by another column, tap the button at the top of the required column.
19.11.3 Filtering Options
The default event log records and displays all events for all Modules and Frames in the system. To reduce the number of log entries displayed, apply the filter options on the right of the screen. Regardless of filtering options currently selected, all events are recorded, and may be displayed later as required.
19.11.3.1 Severity
Recorded events are divided into three categories: FAULTS, WARNINGS and USER ACTIONS. Events in any or all of these categories may be displayed in the log by tapping the three buttons in the SEVERITY box. The
ALL button restores the default state of all three categories being selected.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
19.11.3.2 Source
Using buttons in the SOURCE box, events may also be filtered on the basis of which part of the system generated them. Any or all of six event sources may be selected, as follows:
▸ Loudspeaker Identification
▸ Loudspeaker Temperature
▸ Amplifier Device
▸ Amplifier Output
▸ Other: Audio distribution
▸ Other: Network
The ALL button restores the default state of all six categories being selected.
19.11.3.3 Time
It is possible to display only events which have occurred within a user-defined time interval, using the buttons in the TIME box. The options are:
▸ SINCE HH:MM – Tapping the HH and MM buttons opens a numeric keypad to allow a ‘Start time’ for displayed events to be entered. Tapping the Since button activates the option.
▸
LAST POWER CYCLE – Tapping this button causes the Event Log to only display events which have occurred since the last time the PLM was powered up.
19.12 Global Control Tab
The GLOBAL CONTROL tab is the second of two tabs available in AMPLIFIER GLOBAL VIEW.
To access AMPLIFIER GLOBAL VIEW:
1. Select the ALL page.
2. Tap GLOBAL INFO.
3. Tap EVENTS & CONTROL [F8]
4. Tap the CONTROL tab
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
253
PLM Series Reference and Operation
Figure 19-12: Global Control Tab
19.12.1 Global PLM/LM Power Control
Two buttons, ON and STANDBY, control the power status of all LM and PLM Series devices that are online and present in the current system configuration. A confirmation is required prior to changing this status across all devices.
Both buttons will be blue if a combination of status are present, or one button will be orange if all devices have the same status.
Status indicators to the right of the buttons show the total number of LM and PLM Series devices in the current system configuration that are ON, in STANDBY or OFFLINE.
19.12.2 Global Power Channel Mute Control
Two buttons, ALL MUTED and ALL UNMUTED, indicate and control the power channel mute status across all PLM Series devices that are online and present in the current system configuration. A confirmation is required prior to changing this status across all devices.
PLM Series Reference and Operation
Both buttons will be blue if a combination of status are present, or one button will be orange if all devices have the same status.
Status indicators to the right of the buttons show the total number of PLM Series power channels in the current system configuration that are MUTED, UNMUTED or OFFLINE.
19.12.3 Global Temperature
The current ambient temperature (the temperature of the air surrounding the cabinets) may be entered on this tab. Tapping on the blue button in the AMBIENT TEMPERATURE box opens a numeric keypad for the purpose.
The temperature value is transferred to the LOAD table on the MODULE LOAD tab and used for load verification and monitoring procedures. Buttons allow selection of temperature display in degrees CELSIUS or FAHRENHEIT.
19.12.4 Global LoadSmart
The GLOBAL LOAD CONTROL VERIFY button initiates the system-wide load verification of all Frames.
19.12.5 Global Dual Redundancy Control
Two buttons, ON and OFF, control the Dual Redundancy network status of all LM and PLM Series devices that are online and present in the current system configuration. A confirmation is required prior to changing this status across all devices.
Both buttons will be blue if a combination of status are present, or one button will be orange if all devices have the same status.
Status indicators summarize the number of online devices in the current system configuration that have this status set to ON or OFF.
The power must be cycled on the device for this paremeter change to complete. (i.e. disconnect or turn off mains power then reconnect or turn on mains power).
Please refer to section 8.2.10.4 for further information regarding Dual Redundancy.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
255
PLM Series Reference and Operation
19.12.6 Global Dante Enabled Control
Two buttons, ON and OFF, control the Dante Enabled status of all LM and PLM Series devices that are online and present in the current system configuration. A confirmation is required prior to changing this status across all devices.
Both buttons will be blue if a combination of status are present, or one button will be orange if all devices have the same status. Status indicators summarize the number of online devices in the current system configuration that have this status set to ON or OFF.
Two additional buttons, 48 kHz and 96 kHz control the Dante sample rate for all Dante-enabled devices in the current system configuration.
19.12.7 Global Dante Transmit Enabled Control
Two buttons, ON and OFF, control the Dante Transmit Enabled status of all LM and PLM Series devices that are online and present in the current system configuration. A confirmation is required prior to changing this status across all devices.
Both buttons will be blue if a combination of status are present, or one button will be orange if all devices have the same status.
19.13 Log Files
For every Lake Controller session, two sets of log files are created. These XML files can be viewed as text or imported into Microsoft Excel. The files are located in the installation folder /logs, also available via a
Windows Start menu shortcut.
To import log files into Microsoft Excel, right click on the file and choose OPEN WITH->EXCEL. For Excel
2003 and later, select OPEN AS AN XML LIST.
Earlier versions of Excel (pre-2003) do not provide full XML support and should not be used for log file import.
19.13.1 Statistical log files
Assuming at least one PLM Series device is present in the current system configuration, the Lake Controller software will continuously log statistical information to a file. The logged data includes PLM operation statistics in addition to faults and warnings.
19.13.2 Event Log
When a session is ended the EVENT LOG currently viewable in the EVENT LOG tab is written to a file.
LM Series Reference and Operation
20. LM Series Reference and Operation
This chapter provides information specific to using the Lake Controller with LM Series devices. Please refer to the LM Series Operation Manual for further details on LM Series hardware and front panel functionality.
20.1 Pass-Thru Input Router Functionality
20.1.1 Overview
Although other types of Lake device provide the ability to pass audio directly from any input to any output, the LM Series devices provide the ability for the signal from any of the eight Input Routers to be patched directly to any other output. This allows the result of automatic fail-over input priority switching to be fed to the Module Input, or to any analog or digital output directly.
LM 26 - INPUTS
Dante Receivers 1,2,3,4
AES 1,2,3,4
Analog 1,2
LM 44 - INPUTS
Dante Receivers 1,2,3,4
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Analog 1,2,3,4
Input
Routers
1-4
WITH
INPUT
MUTES
Input
Routers
5-8
NO
MUTES
Input
Mixer A
Input
Mixer B
Module Input Section
Gain
Polarity / Mute
Gain
Polarity / Mute
EQ
EQ
Delay
Delay
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LM 26 - INPUTS
Dante Receivers 1,2,3,4
AES 1,2,3,4
Analog 1,2
LM 44 - INPUTS
Dante Receivers 1,2,3,4
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Analog 1,2,3,4
Pass-thru from Input Router to Output Router (NO MUTES)
Figure 20-1: LM Series Signal Flow (Contour Mode)
LM 26 - OUTPUTS
Dante 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Analog 1,2,3,4,5,6
LM 44 - OUTPUTS
Dante 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Analog 1,2,3,4
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
257
LM Series Reference and Operation
LM 26 - INPUTS
D ante Receivers 1,2,3,4
AES 1,2,3,4
Analog 1,2
LM 44 - INPUTS
Dante Receivers 1,2,3,4
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Analog 1,2,3,4
Module Input Section
Input
Mixer A
Gain EQ
Module Output Section
Delay HPF/LPF
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Input
Mixer B
Gain EQ Delay HPF/LPF
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Input
Routers
1-8
WITH
INPUT
MUTES
Input
Mixer C
Gain EQ Delay HPF/LPF
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LM 26 - OUTPUTS
Dante 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Analog 1,2,3,4,5,6
LM 44 - OUTPUTS
Dante 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Analog 1,2,3,4
Input
Mixer D
Gain EQ Delay HPF/LPF
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LM 26 - INPUTS
D ante Receivers 1,2,3,4
AES 1,2,3,4
Analog 1,2
LM 44 - INPUTS
Dante Receivers 1,2,3,4
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Analog 1,2,3,4
Pass-thru from Input Router to Output Router (NO MUTES)
Figure 20-2: LM Series Signal Flow (Mesa Mode)
directly to any output. This is useful for various reasons, including audio signal conversion (e.g. from analog to digital) and for using the LM Series devices as a break-in box for Dante.
For example, Input Routers 1-4 could be configured to provide inputs to the processing modules, while input routers 7+8 could be configured to provide a stereo break-in for the Dante audio network. As it is the signal coming out of the input router that is connected to the outputs, rather than directly routing the input to the output, this provides the ability to fail-over from AES to Analog input before sending the signal to the output.
This ensures that the receiving device has uninterrupted audio when fail-over from AES to analog occurs.
In Mesa Mode, the signal from all eight Input Routers is available for Input Mute and Module Input Mixer functionality. In Contour
Mode, only Input Routers 1-4 provide this functionality; the signal from Input Routers 5-8 may be patched directly to the outputs.
LM Series Reference and Operation
20.1.2 Configuring Pass-Thru Input to Output via Input Router
To configure the a pass-thru configuration via an input router:
1. Navigate to HOME > MODULE > IO CONFIG > INPUT CONFIGURATION.
2. Configure the input router with the relevant inputs and priorities as described in section 8.2.2.
To route the signal from the pass-thru input routers to a particular output:
3. Navigate to HOME > MODULE > IO CONFIG > OUTPUT CONFIGURATION.
Please refer to section 8.2.8 for further details.
4. Tap the left arrow under the label ‘Source’.
The source will change to display ‘Input Router Outputs’ similar to that shown in Figure 20-3. This
example has the source from Input Router 7 & 8 directly patched to AES4 (Out 7 & 8).
Figure 20-3: Output Configuration - Input Routers selected as Source
5. Use the ‘Destination’ arrows to select the required output type, then select an available (blue) routing point to connect the signal from the Input Router to one of more outputs.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
259
LM Series Reference and Operation
When connecting the Input Router signal directly to an output
(bypassing the Module processing), the Input Router Mutes do not have any affect on the signal path. Please refer to the signal
flow diagrams in Figure 20-1 and Figure 20-2.
20.2 GPIO Configuration
General Purpose Input/Output control (GPIO), allows external devices such as alarm systems to interface with the LM Series devices and control basic functions including mute, preset recall and standby/power control. The LM Series device can report the current state of protective mute and standby settings to an external system and also advise if a fault or warning occurs.
for GPIO technical reference and front panel functionality.
20.3 Remote Power Control & Event Logs
In addition to the common Lake Controller screens available for all Lake devices, the LM Series devices have additional Events & Control tabs available by navigating to EVENTS & CONTROL as described in section
The Control tab provides the ability to remotely control the power/standby state of the LM Series device.
Please refer to section 20.3.2 for further details.
The Event tab provides information on frame activity along with all faults and warnings that occur on the LM
Series device. Please refer to sections 20.3.7 for further details.
20.3.1 Navigation
The Events and Control screens are accessed as described in the following sections, depending on whether a Module, Super Module or Global View is required. Two tabs are displayed at the top of the screen in each
case, distinguished by the words MODULE, SUPER MODULE or GLOBAL as shown in Figure 20-4, Figure
▸ Module View displays Events relating to the selected Module/Frame, and provides Power Control for that Frame only via the Control tab.
▸
Super Module View displays Events relating to all Modules/Frames that are assigned to the selected
Super Module, and provides power control for those Frames.
▸ Global View displays Events relating to all LM and PLM Series Modules/Frames in the current system configuration, and allows power control for all LM and PLM Series Frames.
LM Series Reference and Operation
Super Modules or Systems containing LM & PLM frames will display additional data relevant to PLM
Series devices only. Please refer to chapter 19 for
further details.
20.3.1.1 Accessing Events and Control (Module View)
Events & Control Module View for LM Series devices can be accessed by three different methods.
1. Tap HOME [F1] then tap a Module icon. Ensure LEVELS is selected, then tap EVENTS & CONTROL (located below the first output fader).
2. Tap HOME [F1] then tap MODULES [F3]. Select a Module, tap I/O CONFIG [F4] then tap
EVENTS & CONTROL [F7].
3. Tap HOME [F1] then tap the ALL page tab. Tap a Module icon to directly access EVENTS & CONTROL.
Figure 20-4: LM Series Module Events & Control Tabs
20.3.1.2 Accessing Events & Control (Super Module View)
Events & Control Super Module View for LM Series devices can be accessed by three different methods.
1. Tap HOME [F1] then tap a Super Module icon. Ensure LEVELS is selected, then tap
EVENTS & CONTROL (located below the first output fader).
2. Tap HOME [F1] then tap MODULES [F3]. Select a Super Module, tap SM ROUTING [F4] then tap
EVENTS & CONTROL [F8].
3. Tap HOME [F1] then tap the ALL page tab.
4. Tap a Super Module icon to directly access EVENTS & CONTROL.
Figure 20-5: LM Series Super Module Events & Control Tabs
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
261
LM Series Reference and Operation
20.3.1.3 Accessing Events & Control (Global View)
To access Events & Control Global View:
1. Navigate to the ALL page
2. Tap GLOBAL INFO [F9]
3. Tap EVENTS & CONTROL [F8]
Figure 20-6: Global Events and Control Tabs
20.3.2 Control Tab
The Control screen is selected by tapping the CONTROL tab after navigating to EVENTS & CONTROL. In either case, a similar screen is displayed, with text at the top-left indicating whether Module, Super Module
or Global View is selected as described in section 20.3.1.
Figure 20-7: LM Series Global Control Tab
LM Series Reference and Operation
20.3.3 Global PLM/LM Power Control
Two buttons, ON and STANDBY, control the power status of all LM and PLM Series devices that are online and present in the current system configuration. A confirmation is required prior to changing this status across all devices.
Both buttons will be blue if a combination of status are present, or one button will be orange if all devices have the same status.
Status indicators to the right of the buttons show the total number of LM and PLM Series devices in the current system configuration that are ON, in STANDBY or OFFLINE.
20.3.4 Global Dual Redundancy Control
Two buttons, ON and OFF, control the Dual Redundancy network status of all LM and PLM Series devices that are online and present in the current system configuration. A confirmation is required prior to changing this status across all devices.
Both buttons will be blue if a combination of status are present, or one button will be orange if all devices have the same status.
Status indicators summarize the number of online devices in the current system configuration that have this status set to ON or OFF.
The power must be cycled on the device for this paremeter change to complete. (i.e. disconnect or turn off mains power then reconnect or turn on mains power).
Please refer to section 8.2.10.4 for further information regarding Dual Redundancy.
20.3.5 Global Dante Enabled Control
Two buttons, ON and OFF, control the Dante Enabled status of all LM and PLM Series devices that are online and present in the current system configuration. A confirmation is required prior to changing this status across all devices.
Both buttons will be blue if a combination of status are present, or one button will be orange if all devices have the same status. Status indicators summarize the number of online devices in the current system configuration that have this status set to ON or OFF.
Two additional buttons, 48 kHz and 96 kHz control the Dante sample rate for all Dante-enabled devices in the current system configuration.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
263
LM Series Reference and Operation
20.3.6 Global Dante Transmit Enabled Control
Two buttons, ON and OFF, control the Dante Transmit Enabled status of all LM and PLM Series devices that are online and present in the current system configuration. A confirmation is required prior to changing this status across all devices.
Both buttons will be blue if a combination of status are present, or one button will be orange if all devices have the same status.
The layout and functionality of this screen is designed for compatibility with mixed systems containing both PLM and LM Series devices.
20.3.7 Events Tab
Figure 20-8: Events Tab
The EVENTS tab provides an Event Log listing warnings, faults, and user actions that have occurred on the network since the Lake Controller software was started. In addition, it contains events that can be read from the internal log of the device covering four hours prior to starting the Lake Controller. Various filter options are available for displaying a user-definable subset of the log.
▸
Module View filters the results to show events that apply to the selected Module.
LM Series Reference and Operation
▸
Super Module View filters the results to show events that apply to all Modules in the Super Module.
▸
Global View displays all results for LM and PLM Series devices in the system configuration.
The data set for the most recent event is repeated in the separate horizontal pane at the bottom of the table.
20.3.7.1 Log Entries
Seven items of information per event are displayed in the log in tabular form, as follows:
▸
EVENT – Displays system faults or warning notifications. Icons shown below reference the source of the notification. Icons change color, from yellow (warning) to red (fault) to indicate severity.
▸ START TIME – Displays the system time and date at which the event occurred
▸ DURATION – Displays ACTIVE while the fault/warning is active. Once the fault/warning becomes inactive, the duration for which it was active is displayed. Once the event is cleared, its line of text in the log changes color from white to gray.
▸ FRAME – Identifies the Frame in which the fault/warning/event occurred by displaying the Frame label.
If a Frame label has not been allocated, this field displays the default product model name i.e. LM 26.
▸
MODULE – Displays the name of the Module in which the event occurred. This will be the default name if the Module has not been renamed (i.e. CL3way, 2aux, etc.).
▸ CHANNEL – Indicates the channel on which the event occurred. This column will be blank if the event was a Frame event – e.g. network failure, etc.
▸
DESCRIPTION – Displays a description of the event. A full list of the possible warning messages can be found in the LM and PLM Series Operation Manuals.
20.3.7.2 Sorting Options
The default listing order for the data displayed in the event log is chronological, with the most recent event at the bottom of the list. To sort the data by another column, tap the button at the top of the required column.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
265
LM Series Reference and Operation
20.3.7.3 Filtering Options
The default event log records and displays all events for all Modules on all Frames on the system. It is possible to reduce the number of log entries displayed by applying filter options available on the right hand side of the table. Regardless of filtering options currently selected, all events are recorded, and may be displayed later as required.
Severity
Recorded events are divided into three categories: FAULTS, WARNINGS and USER ACTIONS. Events in any or all of these categories may be displayed in the log by tapping the three buttons in the SEVERITY box. The
ALL button restores the default state of all three categories being selected.
Source
Using buttons in the SOURCE box, events may also be filtered on the basis of which part of the system generated them. Some of these sources apply only to PLM Series devices and will only be relevant for mixed system configurations. Any or all of the event sources may be selected; the sources relevant to LM
Series devices include:
▸
Frame > Device
▸
Other > Audio Distribution
▸
Other > Network
The ALL button restores the default state of all six categories being selected.
Time
It is possible to display only events which have occurred within a user-defined time interval, using the buttons in the TIME box. The options are:
▸
SINCE HH:MM – Tapping the HH and MM buttons opens a numeric keypad to allow a ‘Start time’ for displayed events to be entered. Tapping the Since button activates the option.
▸ LAST POWER CYCLE – Tapping this button causes the Event Log to only display events which have occurred since the last time the PLM was powered up.
20.3.8 Event Log Files
When a session ends, the session’s EVENT LOG is written to a file.
MY8-LAKE Reference and Operation
21. MY8-LAKE Reference and Operation
This chapter provides information specific to using the Lake Controller with MY8-LAKE devices. Please refer to the MY8-LAKE Operation Manual for further details on MY8-LAKE hardware.
21.1 Signal Flow
The diagrams below depict the audio signal flow configurations available for the MY8-LAKE card. Please
refer to the section 8.2.14 for details on how to change the audio processing configuration via the
Lake Controller software.
21.1.1 Mesa Configuration Signal Flow Diagram
The MY8-LAKE defaults to an 8x8 system equalizer configuration known as Mesa mode. This configuration provides eight discrete channels of audio processing as shown below.
MY8-LAKE INPUTS
HOST 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Module Input Section
Module Output Section
Input
Routers
1-8
WITH
INPUT
MUTES
Input
Mixer A
Input
Mixer B
Input
Mixer C
Input
Mixer D
Input
Mixer E
Input
Mixer F
Input
Mixer G
Input
Mixer H
Gain
Gain
Gain
Gain
Gain
Gain
Gain
Gain
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
HPF/LPF
HPF/LPF
HPF/LPF
HPF/LPF
HPF/LPF
HPF/LPF
HPF/LPF
HPF/LPF
Pass-thru from Input Router to Output Router (NO MUTES)
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
MY8-LAKE INPUTS
HOST 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
MY8-LAKE OUTPUTS
HOST 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Figure 21-1: MY8-LAKE Mesa Configuration Signal Flow Diagram
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
267
MY8-LAKE Reference and Operation
21.1.2 Contour Configuration Signal Flow Diagram
In loudspeaker processor configuration (Contour mode), the MY8-LAKE provides a 4x12 matrix of loudspeaker processing Modules as shown in the diagram below.
MY8-LAKE INPUTS
HOST 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Input
Routers
1-4
WITH
INPUT
MUTES
Input
Routers
5-8
NO
MUTES
Module Input Section
Input
Mixer A
Gain
Polarity / Mute
Input
Mixer B
Gain
Polarity / Mute
Input
Mixer C
Gain
Polarity / Mute
Input
Mixer D
Gain
Polarity / Mute
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
Pass-thru from Input Router to Output Router (NO MUTES)
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
MY8-LAKE INPUTS
HOST 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
MY8-LAKE OUTPUTS
HOST 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Figure 21-2: MY8-LAKE Contour Configuration Signal Flow Diagram
MY8-LAKE Reference and Operation
21.1.3 Contour/Mesa Configuration Signal Flow Diagram
In hybrid mode (Contour/Mesa), the MY8-LAKE provides a 4x6 matrix of loudspeaker processing Modules and an 8x4 matrix of single channel EQ Modules as shown in the diagram below.
MY8-LAKE INPUTS
HOST 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Module Input Section
Module Output Section
EQ
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
EQ
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Input
Mixer A
Gain
Polarity / Mute
Input
Mixer B
Gain
Polarity / Mute
EQ
EQ
Delay
Delay
EQ
EQ
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Input
Routers
1-8
WITH
INPUT
MUTES
EQ
EQ
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Input
Mixer C
Gain EQ Delay HPF/LPF
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Input
Mixer D
Gain EQ Delay HPF/LPF
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Input
Mixer E
Input
Mixer F
Gain EQ Delay HPF/LPF
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
Gain EQ Delay HPF/LPF
Pass-thru from Input Router to Output Router (NO MUTES)
Gain / Delay
Polarity / Mute
LimiterMax
RMS/Peak
MY8-LAKE INPUTS
HOST 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
MY8-LAKE OUTPUTS
HOST 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
AES 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Figure 21-3: MY8-LAKE Contour/Mesa Configuration Signal Flow Diagram
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
269
MY8-LAKE Reference and Operation
21.2 Operation Mode
The MY8-LAKE device supports three modes for Host device recognition as shown in Figure 21-4. The
default setting of MY8-AE96 provides full functionality.
Figure 21-4: Card ID Operation Mode for Host data recognition
After changing the operation mode, cycle the power on the MY8-LAKE device to complete the process.
The Operation Mode parameter is unaffected by the recall of a Module or System file, or by the resetting of a Frame to default Contour or Mesa configurations.
21.3 Host Analog Output Reference Configuration
To ensure that limiter levels in the LoadLibrary Module files remain compliant with the MY8-LAKE device, an additional option will be available via the I/O CONFIG entitled ANALOG OUTPUT REFERENCE.
Analog Output Reference provides limiter compensation options as shown in Figure 21-5.
MY8-LAKE Reference and Operation
Figure 21-5: Analog Output Reference Options
The limiter compensation is active only on Host input channels (Host returns) from Contour Module outputs; outputs from Mesa Modules, or other output types will not have this compensation applied.
21.4 I/O Configuration View Mode Options
21.4.1 Simplified View (MY8-LAKE Mesa Configuration Only)
The MY8-LAKE provides a simplified I/O routing view by default for Mesa Mode that allows simple configuration of all input and output parameters. In Simplified View, the following functionality differs compared to normal Lake Controller operation:
▸
The Digital Clock Configuration screen is disabled; the clock signal is locked by default to the same clock as the selected input source (i.e. Host Output or AES Input). Summary data is still displayed confirming the current automatic selection.
▸
The Input Configuration screen is disabled; the input type selected via the Input Toggle (Host Output or
AES Input) is set as Priority 1 for the selected Module and corresponding input (i.e. Module A Input =
Host Out 1 or AES In 1, Module B In = Host Out 2 + AES In 2, etc.)
▸
The Output Configuration screen is disabled; the Module is set to pass the processed signal to the corresponding Host Input and AES Output (i.e. Module A = Host In 1 + AES Out 1,
Module B= Host In 2 + AES Out 2, etc.)
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
271
MY8-LAKE Reference and Operation
Figure 21-6: Signal Path for Mesa Module A in Simplified View
21.4.2 Classic View (All devices and configurations)
The standard fully functional Lake Controller I/O configuration view (Classic View) is also available for
MY8-LAKE Mesa configurations. Classic View is the only option available when the MY8-LAKE is configured in Contour configuration or in the Contour/Mesa hybrid configuration.
This view provides all standard input and output configuration options that are applicable for the
further information.
21.4.3 Changing between Simplified View and Classic View
To change between Simplified View and Classic View:
1. Tap Routing Mode at the bottom left of the screen
2. Tap either the Simplified View or the Classic View button depending on the view required
Figure 21-7: MY8-LAKE Routing Mode Summary
When switching from Classic View to Simplified
View, a router reset will be implemented to return the routing to the default Mesa Configuration routing.
Keyboard Shortcuts
22. Keyboard Shortcuts
This section describes various keyboard shortcuts that are available when using a computer with a keyboard attached.
22.1 Enabling/Disabling Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts are enabled by default. To disable keyboard shortcuts, perform the following steps:
1. From HOME, tap USER PREFERENCES.
2. Tap KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS [F5].
All keyboard shortcuts will be disabled and the function key labels will be removed from the buttons on the button bar. Tap KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS again to enable this feature.
22.2 General Keyboard Shortcuts
▸
ESCAPE - Equivalent to tapping NO or CANCEL for warning messages, dialog boxes and when using the on screen keyboard. Equivalent to tapping EXIT on button bar menus
▸ ENTER - Equivalent to tapping YES or OK for warning messages, dialog boxes and when using the on screen keyboard.
▸
MOUSE WHEEL - Equivalent to dragging the selected filter point up or down on XOVER, PEQ or GEQ screens.
22.3 Button Bar Shortcuts
22.3.1 Context Switching
To change a context view using the keyboard, perform the following steps:
1. Hold down the C key.
2. Tap the number on the keyboard that corresponds to the required context.
3. Release the C key.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
273
Keyboard Shortcuts
22.3.2 Main Navigation/Function Buttons
The [F1] through [F10] function keys are mapped sequentially from left to right to the main navigation and function buttons on the button bar. Pressing a function key will have the same effect as tapping the associated button with a touch-screen pen or pointer. This applies to all button bar buttons throughout the system.
22.3.3 Undo/Redo
To undo/redo the last LEVELS or EQ change, perform the following steps:
1.
2.
Hold down the CTRL key.
Tap the Z key.
This function toggles between undo and redo, providing the same affect as tapping the Undo/Redo button.
22.3.4 Shortcut Combination Keys
Throughout the following sections, specific actions are described. These are based on the generic rules for certain keys as shown below:
▸ TAB: Moves forward, to the right, through pages in the MAIN work area, screens, or EQ overlays.
▸ SHIFT: Used in conjunction with TAB, reverses the order or page/screen/overlay navigation. Used with arrow keys, switches between FINE and NORMAL adjustment mode (LEVELS/EQ/XOVER/AUX).
▸
CAPS LOCK: Permanently selects FINE or NORMAL adjustment mode (LEVELS/EQ/XOVER/AUX).
Does not work in conjunction with TAB.
▸ CTRL: Allows a key to perform another related function.
22.4 EQ, LEVELS, XOVER, and AUX Screen Shortcuts
For the purposes of keyboard shortcut navigation, the TAB function cycles through all LEVELS screens, if a
LEVELS screen is selected, or through all XOVER/AUX/EQ screens if a XOVER/AUX/EQ screen is selected.
▸ TAB+CTRL: Cycles forward through the visible screens for either Levels or XOVER/Aux/EQ, depending on what is currently selected.
▸
TAB: Moves forward (to the right) through visible screens/overlays. When the last screen/overlay is reached, it will cycle back to the first screen/overlay.
▸ TAB+SHIFT: Moves backward (to the left) through visible screens/overlays. On the screen overlay, it will cycle to the last screen/overlay.
Keyboard Shortcuts
22.4.1 GEQ Overlay Shortcuts
▸
LEFT ARROW: Moves the GEQ selector one filter to the left
▸ RIGHT ARROW: Moves the GEQ selector one filter to the right
▸ UP ARROW: Increases the gain of the selected GEQ filter (Fine).
▸ UP ARROW + SHIFT/CAPS LOCK: Increases the gain of the selected GEQ filter (Coarse).
▸
DOWN ARROW: Decreases the gain of the selected GEQ filter (Fine).
▸ DOWN ARROW + SHIFT/CAPS LOCK: Decreases the gain of the selected GEQ filter (Coarse).
22.4.2 PEQ Overlay Shortcuts
▸ [1]: Adds a low-shelf filter at 125 Hz.
▸ [2]: Adds a parametric filter at 500 Hz.
▸
[3]: Adds a Mesa filter with low frequency at 830 Hz and high frequency at 1.2 kHz.
▸ [4]: Adds a high-shelf filter at 8 kHz.
▸ [G]: The gain value for the selected filter is displayed in the on-screen keyboard.
▸ [F]: The frequency value of the selected filter is displayed in the on-screen keyboard.
▸
[F] + [CTRL]: The high-frequency value of a selected Mesa filter is displayed in the on-screen keyboard.
▸ [B]: The bandwidth value of the selected filter is displayed in the on-screen keyboard.
▸ [B] + [CTRL]: The high-bandwidth of the selected Mesa filter is displayed in the on-screen keyboard.
▸ [<]: Moves the center frequency of the selected filter to the left (Fine).
▸
[<] + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Moves the center frequency of the selected filter to the left (Coarse).
▸ [>]: Moves the center frequency of the selected filter to the right (Fine).
▸ [>] + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Moves the center frequency of the selected filter to the right (Coarse).
▸ LEFT ARROW: Selects the filter to the left of the currently selected filter.
▸
RIGHT ARROW: Selects the filter to the right of the currently selected filter.
▸ UP ARROW: Increases the gain of the selected PEQ filter (Fine).
▸ UP ARROW + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]:Decreases the gain of the selected PEQ filter (Coarse).
▸ DOWN ARROW Decreases the gain of the selected PEQ filter (Fine Adjustment).
▸
DOWN ARROW + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Decreases the gain of the selected PEQ filter (Coarse).
▸ [Q]: Increases bandwidth of selected filter, or the lowest frequency segment of a Mesa filter (Fine).
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
275
Keyboard Shortcuts
▸ [Q] + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Increases bandwidth of selected filter, or the lowest frequency segment of a Mesa filter (Coarse).
▸ [W]: Decreases bandwidth of selected filter, or the lowest frequency segment of a Mesa filter (Fine).
▸ [W] + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Decreases bandwidth of selected filter, or the lowest frequency segment of a Mesa filter (Coarse).
▸ [A] Increases the high bandwidth of a selected Mesa filter (Fine).
▸ [A] + + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Increases the high bandwidth of a selected Mesa filter (Coarse).
▸ [S]: Decreases the high bandwidth of a selected Mesa filter (Fine).
▸
[S] + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Decreases the high bandwidth of a selected Mesa filter (Coarse).
▸ [Q]+[CTRL]: Moves the low-frequency segment of a Mesa filter to the left.
▸ [W]+[CTRL]: Moves the low-frequency segment of a Mesa filter to the right.
▸ [A]+[CTRL]: Moves the high-frequency segment of a Mesa filter to the left.
▸
[S]+[CTRL]: Moves the high-frequency segment of a Mesa filter to the right.
22.4.3 XOVER/AUX Screen Shortcuts
▸
[1]: Adds a low-shelf filter to the selected output at 125 Hz.
▸ [2]: Adds a parametric filter to the selected output at 500 Hz.
▸ [3]: Adds an all-pass filter to the selected output at 1 kHz. Available in Designer Mode only.
▸ [4]: Adds a high-shelf filter to the selected output at 8 kHz.
▸
[G]: The gain value for the selected filter is displayed in the on-screen keyboard for instant editing.
▸ [F]: The frequency value of the selected filter is displayed in the on-screen keyboard for instant editing.
▸ [B]: The bandwidth value of the selected filter is displayed in the on-screen keyboard for instant editing.
▸ [O]: The order of a selected all-pass filter is displayed in the on-screen keyboard for instant editing. Not applicable to any other filter type and available only in Designer Mode.
▸ [<]: Moves the center frequency of the selected filter to the left (Fine).
▸ [<] + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Moves the center frequency of the selected filter to the left (Coarse).
▸
[>]: Moves the center frequency of the selected filter to the right (Coarse).
▸ [>] + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Moves the center frequency of the selected filter to the right (Fine).
▸ LEFT ARROW: Selects the filter to the left of the currently selected filter.
▸ RIGHT ARROW: Selects the filter to the right of the currently selected filter.
▸
UP ARROW: Increases the gain of the selected EQ filter (Fine).
Keyboard Shortcuts
▸ UP ARROW + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Increases the gain of the selected EQ filter (Coarse).
▸ DOWN ARROW: Decreases the gain of the selected EQ filter (Fine).
▸
DOWN ARROW + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Decreases the gain of the selected EQ filter (Coarse).
▸ [Q] Increases the bandwidth of the selected EQ filter (Fine).
▸ [Q] + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Increases the bandwidth of the selected EQ filter (Coarse).
▸ [W]: Decreases the bandwidth of the selected EQ filter (Fine).
▸
[W] + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Decreases the bandwidth of the selected EQ filter (Coarse).
22.4.4 LEVELS Screen Shortcuts
▸
[0] + [ENTER]: Displays on-screen keyboard for instant input-level editing of selected level type.
▸ [1] + [ENTER]: Displays on-screen keyboard for OUT 1–level editing for selected level type.
▸ [2] + [ENTER]: Displays on-screen keyboard for OUT 2–level editing for selected level type.
▸ [3] + [ENTER]: Displays on-screen keyboard for OUT 3–level editing for selected level type.
▸
[4] + [ENTER]: Displays on-screen keyboard for OUT 4–level editing for selected level type.
▸ [5] + [ENTER]: Displays on-screen keyboard for OUT 5–level editing for selected level type.
▸ [6] + [ENTER]: Displays on-screen keyboard for OUT 6–level editing for selected level type.
▸ [0] + UP or DOWN ARROW: Increases or decreases INPUT level for selected level type (Fine).
▸
[1] + UP or DOWN ARROW : Increases or decreases OUT 1 level for selected level type (Fine).
▸ [2] + UP or DOWN ARROW: Increases or decreases OUT 2 level for selected level type (Fine).
▸ [3] + UP or DOWN ARROW: Increases or decreases OUT 3 level for selected level type (Fine).
▸ [4] + UP or DOWN ARROW: Increases or decreases OUT 4 level for selected level type (Fine).
▸
[5] + UP or DOWN ARROW: Increases or decreases OUT 5 level for selected level type (Fine).
▸ [6] + UP or DOWN ARROW: Increases or decreases OUT 6 level for selected level type (Fine).
▸ [0] to [6] + UP or DOWN ARROW + [SHIFT] or [CAPS LOCK]: Coarse adjustment mode for the levels of the number/arrow combinations listed above.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
277
External Control Interfaces
23. External Control Interfaces
This chapter describes the options for interfacing with Lake devices from external controllers and interfaces.
Functionality is often product specific; please refer to the relevant product operation manual for additional information.
23.1 GPIO (LM Series Devices Only)
LM Series devices provide General Purpose Input Output functionality (GPIO) allowing interface with external systems. Unlike the other forms of external control described in this chapter, GPIO provides full configuration options via the Lake Controller or via the front panel of LM Series device.
▸
this manual.
▸ For information on configuring GPIO via the Front Panel of the LM Series device, please refer to the
Front Panel Interface chapter of the LM Series Operation Manual.
▸
For information on GPIO hardware, including a pinout reference, please refer to the Back Panel Interface chapter of the LM Series Operation Manual.
23.2 AMX
®
and Crestron
®
Control
23.2.1 DLM Protocol (LM and PLM Series Only)
The Direct Lake Messaging third party protocol (DLM) is provided for LM and PLM Series devices, allowing integration with external control and monitoring applications such as AMX and Crestron. Please email [email protected] to obtain DLM Control Protocol technical information.
The extensive function control list includes:
▸ Frame & Module labelling
▸ Adjustment of Module input gain, delay, mute, phase and label
▸ Adjustment of Module output gain, delay, MaxRMS & MaxPeak limiters, mute, phase and label
▸ Input configuration, Iso-Float & AES Termination controls
▸ Standby power control, factory reset options
▸ Preset Recall (LM & PLM) & Preset Store (PLM Only)
External Control Interfaces
▸
Adjustment of amplifier gain and Voltage Peak Limiter (PLM Only)
▸
Activation of pilot tone on individual power output channels (PLM Only)
▸
Activation of data transmission for amplifier output voltage and current via Dante (PLM Only)
Additionally, the following parameters may be retrieved from LM and PLM Series devices using the DLM
Protocol:
▸ Preset Name, Firmware Version, Unique ID and Mac Address
▸ IP Address and Subnet Mask
▸ Dante Break-In and Enable Status
▸ Input Activity and Configuration
▸ Metering and Fault Information
▸ Current DSP > Amp Routing (PLM Only)
▸ Amp and DLM Latency in milliseconds (PLM Only)
▸ Output channel Impedance Measurement in Ohms (PLM Only)
These external control systems must form valid Ethernet packets that follow the requirements of the network packet specification. Please email [email protected] to obtain the information required for integration.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
279
Command Line Options
24. Command Line Options
24.1 Overview
The Lake Controller provides a number of command-line options to enable or disable certain functionality.
These options may be entered when launching the Controller from a command prompt, or may be set using a shortcut’s target option.
As an example, the following steps describe how to configure a shortcut on the desktop to launch the
Lake Controller in daylight mode:
1. Right-click on the Microsoft Windows desktop and select NEW > SHORTCUT.
2. When asked for the location of the item type the following, ensuring you use quotation marks as shown below, and exchanging LAKE CONTROLLER vX.X for the Lake Controller the installation directory.
”C:\Program Files\Lake\Lake Controller vX.X\Lake Controller.exe” daylight
3. Tap NEXT.
4. When asked for a shortcut name, enter OUTDOOR.
5. Tap FINISH.
Multiple shortcut command line options may be used by separating them with a space.
24.2 Reference
Table 24-1 on page 281 describes the options for command line functionality.
Command Line Options
Command
daylight digswitch emulation fullscreen netfix nodblclick nonfullscreen offline systemmem
Description
Forces daylight mode when opening the Lake Controller.
Enables a button labelled “Prio” at the top right of the Lake Controller next to the minimize button. Tapping this button provides additional options to allow the entire system to be switched instantly between Input prioirty 1,2,3 or 4, or reverted to independant automatic selection, or to check the current status of all frames.
[Prio 1] forces all online devices in the current system configuration to use forced priority 1 input for all input routers. Prio 2, 3 and 4 work on the same way for the associated input priorities.
[Auto] reverts all inputs of all frames to automatic priority selection.
[Check] displays a report of input router status for frames in the current system configuration.
Disables hardware graphics-card based acceleration and enables software emulation for graphics acceleration. This may be useful for devices with low-end graphics cards, where virtual control of the Lake Controller is required, or where video hardware problems are encountered. When this command is enables, the systemmem command has no effect as all data is stored in memory. This option may decrease performance.
Forces the screen resolution during the Controller session to 1024×768 16-bit color, instead of the current Windows settings. These changes apply only to the
Lake Controller, and are restored when minimizing or quitting the Controller.
Enables the automatic disabling of unused multiple network adapters in the case of communication errors. Only use if you have multiple network cards and are experiencing communication problems.
Disables the use of double-clicking on the menu bar to rename Groups or select files.
This mode stops the automatic change of any video card settings during the
Controller session; therefore correct manual settings must be made. The whole screen is still used. This is not a windowed mode option.
Forces the Controller into offline mode during start-up so no network adapter is selected.
Forces the use of system memory (RAM) instead of dedicated or shared video memory on the graphics-card (GPU) for certain graphics resources. This may be useful if available video memory is exceeded, or if other video-memory related issues are encoutered. If this option does not resolve the encoutered problem, try using the emulation option described above. This option may decrease performance.
Table 24-1: Command Line Options
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
281
Firmware Update
25. Firmware Update
25.1 Backup System Configuration and Presets
While every effort is made to retain all settings in the device during the firmware upgrade procedure, it is highly recommended that the following steps are followed:
1. Open the previously used version of the Lake Controller software.
2. Tap YES when asked “Do you want to recall the last configuration?”
3. Store the current system configuration using the old version of the Lake Controller.
4. Open the previous of the associated Preset Manager and store all Presets that are contained within all
Lake devices on the network.
5. Proceed to section 25.2 and update the device firmware.
25.2 Updating Firmware
The Lake Firmware Update Utility provides a fast firmware upgrade procedure for small or large networks of
Lake devices. Follow the steps below to upgrade your device:
1. Install the latest version of the Lake Controller software.
2. Power on all devices, and connect using a wired network.
3. Select the Lake Firmware Update Utility via Windows START > PROGRAMS > LAKE CONTROLLER
By default, this utility is located in a folder labeled: Lake Controller vX.X > Firmware Update Utilities
4. Select the platform to update from the dialog that is displayed as shown in Figure 25-1.
Figure 25-1: Device Platform Selection Dialog
Always ensure you select a wired network for updating firmware as a loss in connectivity could corrupt the firmware.
Firmware Update
Figure 25-2: Network Adapter Selection
5. Select the wired adapter to which the Lake devices are connected.
The Lake devices will appear in a list with their current firmware versions displayed, similar to that shown in
default to the latest version available.
Figure 25-3: PLM Firmware Utility Main Screen
6. Tap SELECT OLD and then UPDATE. A warning message appears.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
283
Firmware Update
Figure 25-4: Firmware Update Warning Message
7. Tap OK in response to the warning message. All selected devices are updated in parallel with the latest firmware. A green tick indicates the firmware is already at the latest version, a percentage indicates the update status for the devices currently being updated, and a red cross indicates the firmware is old and is awaiting update or the device requires a power-cycle to complete the upgrade.
Figure 25-5: Firmware Update Status
8. Wait for all devices to be updated.
A message appears, indicating that you must restart the updated Frames. When the firmware on an LM
Series, PLM Series or MY8-LAKE device is updated, the warning advises that the mains power must be cycled (using the standby button on the Front Panel is not sufficient). For the MY8-LAKE, please powercycle the host device.
9.
Figure 25-6: Firmware Update Confirmation
Cycle the power of each Lake device appropriately.
Firmware Update
The mains power must be cycled to complete the firmware update on an LM or PLM series device.
Pressing the front panel standby button will not complete the upgrade.
10. Tap OK, then tap EXIT to quit the firmware update utility.
For PLMs, if the firmware includes a change for amplifier or front panel components, additional upgrade activity and progress will be indicated on the front panel. After an upgrade of the amplifier firmware, the unit will reboot automatically.
25.3 Old Firmware Notification in Lake Controller
If a device with old firmware is placed in the Lake Controller work area, an indication similar to that shown in
Figure 25-7 will be displayed on the associated Module icons.
Figure 25-7: Old Firmware Notification in the Lake Controller
The firmware cannot be updated from within the Lake Controller; to update firmware, quit the
Lake Controller and access Lake Firmware Update Utility as described in section 25.2.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
285
Preset Manager
26. Preset Manager
The Lake Preset Manager Utilities are provided as separate applications for each Lake device. These utilities operate on any PC with a Microsoft Windows XP or above, and a standard Ethernet network interface.
For further details about presets, please refer to section 6.10 of this manual.
Using the Preset Manager utilities, a sound engineer can easily manage the presets that reside on the device. Presets can be created, named, copied, locked, and transferred across multiple devices of the same type and may also be set to exclude the recall of Frame labels and Dante device names when a preset is recalled.
Presets may be stored into PC files (called bank files) for backup or transfer purposes; these files have different file extensions depending on the device type.
There are two Preset Manager utilities, one for each range of Lake devices:
▸
LM Series Preset Manager
▸
PLM Series Preset Manager
All LM Series devices are accessed via the LM Series Preset Manager utility; PLM Series devices are accessed via the PLM Series Preset Manager. Model selection is made within each application, presets are not transferable between models within the same range, or across ranges.
A preset is specific to each type device, and therefore cannot be used for other devices. Preset Manager functionality is identical for both applications, allowing the storage of up to 100 presets per device.
In the following sections, the PLM 10000Q Preset Manager will be used as an example; this tutorial will help you start using the Lake Preset Manager software quickly by providing an overview of common features. The examples provided will guide you through basic setup procedures.
At least one Lake device must be connected to proceed with this tutorial. This tutorial assumes the use of a factory-reset device; if necessary, please refer to your associated product operation manual for information on how to restore the factory configuration.
26.1 Starting the Lake Preset Manager
To start the Lake Preset Manager, select the Windows Start menu, then select
Programs > Lake Controller vX.X > Preset Manager Utilities.
Select the preset manager applicable to your product; the following example shows the PLM Preset Manager after selecting the device type of PLM 10000Q, displaying only online devices of that type.
Preset Manager
Figure 26-1: Preset Manager Default State
26.2 Screen Layout
26.2.1 Main Area
The main area is divided into four columns labeled ABCD in Figure 22 1. By default, columns A&B display the contents for the presets folder located on the computer and Columns C&D show the online Frames.
The current directory path is displayed above column A
/ C when COMPUTER is selected. The Preset Manager stores this location upon exiting the program, and restores it when restarted.
26.2.2 Button Bar Interface
the button status.
▸ ORANGE - currently selected function
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
287
Preset Manager
▸
BLUE - available function based on current selection
▸
GRAY - unavailable function based on current selection
26.3 Working with Frames
26.3.1 Selecting a Frame
To select a single Frame, tap the associated row in column C. The selected Frame is highlighted orange.
Buttons are enabled and disabled depending on the current selection. With one or more Frames selected, the presets are displayed in the column to the right.
Figure 26-2: Online Frames
26.3.1.1 Rename Frame [F5]
Allows the name of the selected Frame to be changed. Only alphanumerical characters are accepted.
26.3.1.2 Select Multiple [F6]
Allows the selection of multiple Frames/presets by tapping multiple times on column C or D.
Equivalent to holding down [CTRL] on a keyboard.
26.3.1.3 Set Frame Password/Change Password [F7]
Sets or changes the current Frame password.
26.3.2 Storing a Preset
To store the current configuration as a preset on an online Frame:
1. Select an empty slot in column D, and tap STORE PRESET [F2].
2. Enter a name in the popup window, and tap OK.
The current configuration is now stored as a preset on the selected Frames.
Preset Manager
Figure 26-3: List of Presets for Selected Frame
When an existing preset is selected, functions available are:
26.3.2.1 Recall Preset [F1]
Loads the selected preset as the current configuration for selected Frames.
26.3.2.2 Store Preset [F2]
Stores the current configuration as a preset on the selected Frames.
26.3.2.3 Clear Preset [F4]
Clears the selected presets on the selected Frames.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
289
Preset Manager
26.3.2.4 Rename Preset [F5]
Renames the selected preset on the selected Frames.
If one or more of the selected Frames contains a different configuration in a particular preset location,
*MISMATCH* displays as the name for that system preset location.
The RECALL PRESET and RENAME PRESET buttons are disabled when a location is selected for multiple
Frames that contain a preset mismatch.
26.3.2.5 Select Multiple [F6]
Allows the selection of multiple items. Equivalent to holding down [CTRL] on a keyboard.
26.3.2.6 Set Frame Password/Change Password [F7]
Sets or changes the current Frame password.
26.3.2.7 Lock Preset/Unlock Preset [F8]
Presets can be locked to prevent changes or deletion. Locking the first preset on a Frame requires a Frame password to be set. When a preset is locked, a lock icon is displayed next to it and next to its Frame. Any further operation on that preset requires the user to enter the Frame password.
Figure 26-4: Online Frame with Locked and Unlocked Presets
In this example, Presets 1+4 are locked, and Presets 2+3 are unlocked. When a Preset is locked, the
Exclude/Include Labels function may be changed without the need to enter a password. Please refer to
Exclude/Inlude Labels section below for further information on this feature.
Unlocking a preset removes its lock but not the associated Frame password.
Preset Manager
To remove an existing Frame password, select the
Frame, tap CHANGE PASSWORD, enter the current password, then tap OK twice.
Figure 26-5: Online Frame with Locked Presets and Password Removed
preset again.
26.3.2.8 Exclude/Include Labels [F9]
Presets may be set to exclude the Frame label and Dante device name by using the EXCLUDE LABELS function. When the Exclude Labels function has been activated for a Preset (indicated by a crossed tag icon
the existing setting when the Preset is recalled.
The Exclude/Include Labels function works on individual and multiple presets in bank files and online frames based on the currently selected preset or presets.
This function is available only via the Preset Manager utility, but the Exclude Labels status for each Preset is
visible via the Lake Controller as shown in Figure 6-3 on page 67.
26.4 Working with Bank Files
A bank file is a software file, stored on a computer or external storage device, that contains the details for all presets on a device. It can be used as a backup file, as well as to transfer presets between devices. The bank file is specific to each device type.
It is recommended to Exclude Labels on all Presets when transferring the same Presets or Bank Files to multiple devices. If Exclude Labels is not set, the device’s Frame Label and Dante device name will change during Preset Recall to the value present when the Preset was created.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
291
Preset Manager
26.4.1 Creating a New Bank File
A new empty bank file is created by tapping NEW BANK [F3]. This button is available only when the
COMPUTER column is selected, column A by default.
After entering a bank file name, either double-tap the bank file in column A, or select the bank file and tap
OPEN [F1]. The empty bank file is shown in column B.
A bank file can also be created by dragging an online Frame (column C) into column A (or vice versa). This bank file contains all presets from the dragged Frame, and thus may not be empty. An automatic name is set for that bank file.
Figure 26-6 shows a bank file containing four presets with varying Lock and Exclude Label statuses.
Figure 26-6: Open Bank File in Default Presets Folder
26.4.2 Bank File / Folder Functions
When a bank file or a folder is selected, the following options are available.
Preset Manager
26.4.2.1 Open [F1]
The action of OPEN [F1] depends on what is currently selected. If a bank file is selected, it displays the presets of the selected bank file in column C or D. If a folder is selected, it displays the contents of the folder in column A or B.
26.4.2.2 New Folder [F2]
Creates a new folder in the working directory.
26.4.2.3 Delete [F4]
Deletes the selected items.
26.4.2.4 Rename [F5]
Renames the selected item.
26.4.2.5 Select Multiple [F6]
Allows the selection of multiple items. Equivalent to holding down [CTRL] on a keyboard.
26.4.2.6 Set Bank Password/Change Password [F7]
Sets or changes the password for the selected bank file. When a password is set, a lock icon is displayed next to the bank file and on any locked Presets. Bank File and Frame passwords follow the same logic.
To remove an existing password, tap
CHANGE PASSWORD, enter the current password, then tap OK twice.
26.4.3 Preset Functions
When a preset in a bank file is selected, the following actions are available.
26.4.3.1 Clear Preset [F4]
Deletes the selected presets from the bank file.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
293
Preset Manager
26.4.3.2 Rename Preset [F5]
Renames the selected preset in the bank file.
26.4.3.3 Select Multiple [F6]
Allows the selection of multiple items using multiple single tap actions; equivalent to holding down [CTRL] on a keyboard.
26.4.3.4 Set Bank Password/Change Password [F7]
Sets or changes the password for the selected bank file. When a password is set, a lock icon is displayed next to the bank file and on any locked Presets. Bank file and Frame passwords follow the same logic.
To remove an existing password, tap
CHANGE PASSWORD, enter the current password, then tap OK twice.
26.4.3.5 Lock / Unlock Preset [F8]
Locks or unlocks the selected preset/s in a bank file as described in section 26.3.2.7.
26.4.3.6 Exclude / Include Labels [F8]
26.4.4 Transferring Presets between Bank Files and Devices
To transfer Presets between Devices and Bank Files, select the Preset/s and drag between column B and
column D as shown in Figure 26-7.
Figure 26-7: Transferring Presets from a Device to a Bank File
Preset Manager
In this exmaple, files are copied from the device to the computer (bank file) and will appear in the destina-
transferred in the same way as indicated below.
Figure 26-8: Transferring Presets from a Bank File to a Device
26.4.5 Bank Filename Extensions
Each Lake device has a unique file extension for Bank files as shown in Table 26-1.
Lake Device
PLM 20000Q
Bank Filename Extension
.tpa
PLM 14000
PLM 10000Q
.gpa
.ppa
LM 44
LM 26
20000DP
.fpa
.lpa*
.tsb
Table 26-1: Bank File Extensions
*The LM 26 and legacy Dolby Lake Processor file extensions are identical, although the Presets contained within these files are not compatible across these device types.
26.5 Common Functionality
26.5.1 Exit [F10]
Closes the Preset Manager application.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
295
IP Address Reference
27. IP Address Reference
In most applications, the IP addresses and other configuration parameters of the underlying Ethernet system will not need to be adjusted by the end user. If a system requires advanced networking requirements, however, such as the partitioning of a high-bandwidth Ethernet backbone into virtual local area networks
(VLANs), then a qualified network engineer may need to make adjustments to the default Ethernet configuration of the Lake device and the computer running the Lake Controller software. This chapter provides reference information pertaining to Ethernet configuration.
27.1 Network Essentials
Ethernet is a cost-effective and easy-to-configure system for networking personal computers, servers, local area networks (LANs), industrial and professional equipment, and even provides the fundamental transport backbone of the Internet. Since Ethernet is widely used for many applications, there are a number of rules governing network configuration to ensure there are no conflicts between multiple devices.
IP addresses provide the unique identifier of each node (unit of network hardware) on an Ethernet network.
The address uniquely identifies the network that the node is on, as well as uniquely identifying the node on that network. For example, this unique identifier ensures that personal computers all around the world do not clog the Internet with messages intended for local data transfers.
Since Ethernet is used locally and globally, Ethernet standards reserve ranges of IP addresses for various applications. Public IP addresses are used on the Internet, and should not be used in LANs. A range of private
IP addresses have also been defined and set aside for use on internal networks. These private IP addresses can be used on internal networks by anyone, as the Internet’s backbone routers will not route packets with these addresses.
Lake devices and the Lake Controller software have been developed and tested for use on internal networks that are not intended to be connected to the Internet. Therefore, we recommend that you use private IP addresses when configuring the network.
27.2 Factory Reset Configuration
A factory reset Lake device will have an IP address set in the Automatic Private IP Address range
169.254.x.x with a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0.
Dante digital audio networking utilizes the Dante Discovery service to automatically identify all Dante devices on the network. It is imperative that the Dante Controller, which includes installation of the Dante
Discovery service, is installed on the Lake Controller PC for Dante to function.
The default starting point is for all device to be left with this factory reset automatic IP address range, with the Controller PC configured to obtain an IP address automatically. If problems are encountered, or you require a more complex configuration, please refer to a network specialist, and in the case of a Dante audio network, refer also to:
IP Address Reference
▸
Dante specific documentation included in the Lake Controller software installation
▸
Lake Processing forum @ http://supportforum.lakeprocessing.com
If desired, you can also use Class A, Class B or Class C private IP address ranges. These addresses require
additional configuration, and thus more knowledge of IP addresses and networking. Table 27-1 shows a
selection of private IP address ranges recommended for use with the Lake device and Lake Controller network. It is recommended that all hardware is configured with a private IP address within these ranges.
Class Range
A 10.x.x.x
B 169.254.x.x (Default - Automatic Private IP Address)
C 172.16.x.x through 172.31.x.x*
D 192.168.0.x through 192.168.255.x
Table 27-1: Recommended Private IP Addresses
*172.31.x.x is used on the secondary computer’s network interface for Dante Dual Redundancy configuration. Please
refer to chapter 3 for further details.
Lake devices and Lake Controllers can be configured to communicate over a network using any IP address and subnet mask combination required for your particular application. More sophisticated networks that include traffic from other professional and consumer equipment must be configured correctly to achieve desired operation.
IP Address & Dual Redundancy settings can only be changed either manually by the user via software, or via a
Factory Reset. These parameters are unaffected by System
Recall, Preset Recall, Frame Replace, Soft Reset etc.
Lake Controller Operation Manual Rev 1.4.5
297
Corporate Information
28. Corporate Information
28.1 Contact Details
Address: LAKE
SE-434 37 Kungsbacka
SWEDEN
Phone:
Fax:
+46 300 56 28 00
+46 300 56 28 99
Email: [email protected]
Website: www.lakeprocessing.com
28.2 Trademarks
Lake is a national and/or international registered trademarks of Lab.gruppen AB. PLM, Powered Loudspeaker
Management, LoadLibrary, LoadSmart, SpeakerSafe, BEL and ISVPL are trademarks of Lab.gruppen AB.
Dolby is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Ideal Graphic EQ, Dolby Lake Processor,
Contour Pro 26, Mesa Quad EQ, LimiterMax and Iso-Float are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Audinate is a registered trademark of Audinate Pty Ltd. Dante and Zen are trademarks of Audinate Pty Ltd. EAW is a registered trademark of LOUD Technologies Inc.
All other trademarks remain the property of their respective owners.
Copyright © 2013 Lab.gruppen AB. All rights reserved.
Operation Manual
I N T E R N A T I O N A L C O N T A C T ► I N F O @ L A K E P R O C E S S I N G . C O M U S & C A N A D A C O N T A C T ► I N F O @ T C G - A M E R I C A S . C O M
L A K E I S A W H O L L Y - O W N E D S U B S I D I A R Y O F L A B . G R U P P E N A B , S W E D E N
W W W . L A B G R U P P E N . C O M
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement